Gigaset DE900IP Pro User Manual

DE900 IP PRO
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / Intro.fm / 11/4/10
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO – More than just a telephone
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO – More than just a telephone
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PROis an IP phone designed for professional use.
u Easy to set up
Use automatic configuration or the default settings for approx. 200 preconfigured
VoIP providers.
u Web user interfaces for configuration
Operate and configure your telephone from your PC with ease.
u High Definition Sound Performance – HDSP
Make phone calls with brilliant sound quality.
u Phone functions for the professional user
Use the call divert, conference call, automatic ringback, call reject and Do Not Disturb
(DND) functions.
u Multiple directories
Manage your personal directory with up to 500 vCards (caller pictures are possible).
Use an LDAP directory or online directories on the Internet.
u Network connection
Connect your telephone to the local network via Ethernet. Connect a PC using your telephone as a gigabit Ethernet switch.
u Wireless connection to the local network (WLAN)
Use your telephone in a wireless network.
u Numerous options for mobile communication
Use DECT, Bluetooth or cable to connect a headset. You can connect a handset via
DECT or Bluetooth and a mobile phone via DECT.
u Protect the environment
Reduce environmental pollution with the power-saving power adapter and by automatically deactivating the DECT function. Reduce radiation with Eco Mode+ for DECT.
u Gigaset MobileOFFICE™
Do you change workstations? Ensure your PC and phone settings are available wherever you work.
u Individual settings
Load your own pictures and ringers, subscribe to Internet services and choose how
you want the display to look.
Assign functions or frequently used numbers to the keys.
u Virtually unlimited storage
Connect a USB storage device to save more pictures, ringers and vCards.
Further information about your phone can be found at
www.gigaset.com/pro
2
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / overview.fm / 11/4/10
Phone overview
Phone overview
Understanding the keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Mute key
Speaker key
Headset key
Volume key
Display keys
Information Centre
Do Not Disturb key
Call records key
Message Centre
End call/back key
Version 2, 27.05.2010
11 Navigation key
12
13
14
15
Consultation key
Conference key
Transfer key
Function keys
1
2
6
7
3
8
4
9
10
5
11 12
13
14
15
Activate/deactivate microphone (mute)
Activate/deactivate speaker
Make call via headset
Depending on the operating mode: Adjust the volume of the
speaker, receiver, headset or ringer
Activate display functions
Open the Information Centre
Do Not Disturb (DND) function
Record a call
Open call and message lists
End/reject call; cancel function;
go back one menu level (press briefly);
return to idle status (press and hold)
Scroll through lists and entries. In idle status:
È Open redial list.
‰
Z
Confirm or start action, select entry
Open directory
Initiate/end consultation call
Initiate conference call
Transfer call to another party
Programmable keys
£ Page 36
£ Page 36
£ Page 34
£ Page 35
£ Page 22
£ Page 68
£ Page 36
£ Page 37
£ Page 62
£ Page 26
£ Page 24
£ Page 24
£ Page 43
£ Page 24
£ Page 47
£ Page 39
£ Page 40
£ Page 41
£ Page 151
3
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / overview.fm / 11/4/10
Phone overview
Understanding Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
A Flashes
B
C
E
F
G
J
K
S
Lights up
Flashes
Lights up
Lights up
Flashes
New message in the Message Centre.
Lights up
Call is being recorded.
Lights up
"Do Not Disturb" function is activated.
Lights up
One or more callers on hold.
Lights up
Conference call is activated.
Flashes
Lights up
Incoming call on the number programmed to this key.
Call is being made on the number programmed to this key.
Understanding the display
Display icons
Currently used
account £ Page 30
Date and Time
You set the time and date
format using the Web
configurator
Page 136.
£
£ Page 34
£ Page 36
£ Page 34
£ Page 34
£ Page 36
£ Page 62
£ Page 37
£ Page 36
£ Page 39
£ Page 40
£ Page 32
Incoming call.
Call is being made via the speaker.
Incoming call (a headset must be connected).
Call is being made via the headset.
The microphone is muted.
T Current time
T Display icons
U
U
T Area of application
Adjustable display, e.g.,
time zone, time, calendar,
Page 75
picture
U
£
Call
Select Line
T Display functions
(Page 22)
Understanding the display symbols
« ÐiÑÒ Signal strength of the WLAN connection (device connected via WLAN).
Ý
¼ DECT function is activated. A green icon indicates that Eco Mode+ is also activated.
¼ôHeadset connected via DECT.
¼l Mobile phone connected via DECT.
ò Bluetooth function (BT) activated.
òô Headset connected via BT.
òl Mobile phone connected via BT.
ó Ringer deactivated.
USB storage device is connected. The icon flashes when data is being transferred.
à New messages on the network mailbox.
™
·
Alarm clock function activated. The wake-up time is displayed to the right.
Ë New e-mails.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The number
is displayed to the
right.
Missed calls.
£ Page 88
£ Page 104
£ Page 95
£ Page 91
£ Page 92
£ Page 91
£ Page 71
£ Page 57
£ Page 43
£ Page 59
£ Page 65
Other icons may appear depending on the function. These are displayed alongside the corresponding
description.
4
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingIVZ.fm / 11/4/10
Contents
Contents
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO – More than just a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Phone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Understanding the keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Understanding Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Following safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the phone in different scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Check the package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up and connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the device (for the first time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proceeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
18
21
Using the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operating via the keypad and display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using functions when making a telephone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a call to multiple participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up call divert (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
34
34
35
38
42
Using the call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Viewing entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialling a number from a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying an entry from the call list to the directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting an entry or list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
44
45
46
Using directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using the local directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your local directory on a USB stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an LDAP directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using online directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
51
52
53
Managing messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Managing voice mails on the network mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing messages via the Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
58
59
62
5
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingIVZ.fm / 11/4/10
Contents
Managing the calendar and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Managing the calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying missed alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
64
64
65
Using Internet services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Displaying Internet services in the Information Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Configuring basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the ringer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating/deactivating advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the device to the default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
71
73
74
81
81
Configuring settings for the local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
LAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Connecting a mobile phone or headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connecting a headset via RJ9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connecting a mobile phone or headset via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connecting a mobile phone or headset via DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Using the resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Managing screensavers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Managing caller pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Managing sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Checking the capacity of the Resource Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Using a USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Using a USB storage device to expand the memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Using a USB stick for Gigaset MobileOFFICE™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Starting the Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Understanding the Web configurator menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Running the setup assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Network and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Telephony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingIVZ.fm / 11/4/10
Contents
Checking the status of the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Caring for your telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using insert strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using Gigaset QuickSync – additional functions for the PC interface . . . . . . . . . . 163
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Service (Customer Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Protecting our environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Using free software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
7
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / security.fm / 11/4/10
Following safety precautions
Following safety precautions
Warning
Be sure to read this user guide and the safety precautions before using your telephone.
$
Use only the power adapter supplied, as indicated on the underside of
the telephone.
Using your telephone may affect nearby medical equipment. Be aware of
the technical conditions in your particular environment, e.g., doctor's surgery.
Do not install the phone in a bathroom or shower room. The phone is not
splashproof.
Do not use your phone in environments where there is a risk of explosion,
e.g., auto paint shops.
ƒ
If you give your phone to a third party, make sure you also give them the
user guide.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Remove faulty telephones from use or have them repaired by our Service
team, as they could interfere with other wireless services.
8
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone in different scenarios
Using the phone in different scenarios
Using your phone in a professional environment with phone system and
server structure
If you use your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO in a corporate network with a telephone infrastructure, your phone incorporates functions and data from the phone system and servers.
In a corporate environment, the VoIP accounts and most of the settings are configured
centrally by the phone system.
DSL connection
6
1
ISDN, S2M
5
4
2
7
3
§§1§§ Gigaset IP telephone
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§2§§ Gigaset IP telephone with integrated gigabit switch (Gigaset DE900 IP PRO).
Your PC is connected directly to the phone, providing you with an additional LAN connection in your network.
§§3§§ DECT base station for connection to DECT handsets
§§4§§ Ethernet switch
Supports Quality of Service (QoS), Gigabit Ethernet and PoE (Power over Ethernet).
§§5§§ Phone system (e.g., Gigaset T500 PRO)
Forms Internet telephony, ISDN or S2M connections. Analogue devices can be connected. A network connection is established using Ethernet.
§§6§§ Acts as a gateway to the Internet for the connected devices. Routes VoIP calls from the
phone system to the Internet.
§§7§§ File, e-mail and workgroup servers, or NAS systems, can be wirelessly integrated into
the phone system architecture. As a result:
– Invitations to conference calls can be organised via the phone system
– The phone system can be backed up to a server or the system can be started via the
network
– Online directories (LDAP) can be managed centrally
9
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone in different scenarios
Using your phone in a simplified environment without a phone system
You can also use your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO without a phone system.
Internet
Connection
3
1
ISDN,
S2M
2
SIP provider
§§1§§ Gigaset IP telephone with integrated gigabit switch (Gigaset DE900 IP PRO).
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Your PC is connected directly to the phone, providing you with an additional LAN connection in your network.
§§2§§ Acts as a gateway to the Internet for the connected devices. Routes VoIP calls from the
phone to the Internet. You establish the connection to the gateway via cable or wirelessly via WLAN.
§§3§§ The SIP provider transfers calls from the Internet and establishes a connection with the
standard telephone network.
In this scenario, you must manually configure the VoIP accounts for your phone. You can
create up to 12 VoIP accounts on your phone.
10
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
First steps
Check the package contents
Telephone: Gigaset DE900 IP PRO
Receiver with cable for connection to the
phone
Ethernet cable for connection to the local
network (switch/router/gateway)
Power adapter for connecting the phone to
the mains power supply (if required)
with three different plug-in modules
(Europe, Great Britain, USA)
The device is powered by PoE (Power over
Ethernet) if it is connected to a switch with
PoE-functionality (£ Page 15).
Version 2, 27.05.2010
CD containing Gigaset QuickSync™ PC software
and this user guide
Insert strips for labelling
the function keys (with protective film)
11
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Firmware update
Whenever there are new or improved functions for your Gigaset, firmware updates are
made available for you to download to your phone (Page 159). If this results in operational changes to your phone, a new version of this user guide or the necessary amendments are published on the Internet at www.gigaset.com/pro.
Select the product to open the relevant product page for your telephone, where you will
find a link to the user guide.
To find out what version of firmware is currently loaded on your phone, see Page 161.
Setting up and connecting the device
The phone is designed for use in dry rooms in a temperature range of ±0°C to +45°C.
¤ Set up the phone at a central point where a connection to the local network is available.
Please note
The following conditions must be observed:
u If you want to establish a wireless connection using DECT, pay attention to the range
of the base station. This is up to 300 m in unobstructed outdoor areas and up to 50
m inside buildings.
u If you wish to establish a connection with the local network using WLAN, please
ensure that the device is within range of the access point.
Warning
u Never expose the Gigaset DE900 IP PRO to the following:
heat sources, direct sunlight or other electrical appliances.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
u Protect your Gigaset from moisture, dust, corrosive liquids and fumes.
12
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Connecting the receiver
1
3
2
§§1§§ Insert the connector, which can be found on the longer straight end of the connection
Version 2, 27.05.2010
cable, into the connection port on the bottom of the phone.
§§2§§ Place the straight part of the cable in the cable recess provided.
3 Insert the other jack on the connection cable into the port on the receiver.
13
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Connecting the network cable
To make calls via VoIP, your phone must have Internet access. This connection is established in the local network via a gateway.
You connect your phone to the same local network as the gateway. See the Using the
phone in different scenarios section on Page 9 for an overview of the different options.
1
2
§§1§§ Attach one end of the Ethernet cable supplied to the right-hand LAN port on
the rear of the phone.
§§2§§ Attach the other end of the Ethernet cable to a LAN port on your network Ethernet switch or on the router itself.
An Ethernet cable is not required if you connect your phone to the local network using
WLAN. However, we recommend that you use a cable the first time you establish a connection.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Warning
If you connect your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO to a PoE-capable Ethernet switch (PoE class
IEEE802.3af ), it will be supplied with power via PoE (Power over Ethernet). The PoE network must not exceed the premises boundaries.
14
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Connecting the PC
You must connect your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO to a PC to use the Web user interface or to
configure the phone using the Web configurator.
Your phone has an integrated two-port switch. This allows you to connect your PC to the
local network via the phone and avoid using additional connection ports on the switch or
router.
You need an additional Ethernet cable to connect a PC.
2
1
§§1§§ Connect an Ethernet cable to the left-hand LAN port on the rear of the phone.
§§2§§ Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a LAN port on the PC.
Connecting a device to the mains power supply (if required)
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO is supplied with sufficient power by PoE (Power over Ethernet)
and does not need to be connected to the mains power supply. Prerequisite: The device
is connected to an Ethernet switch with PoE functionality (PoE class IEEE802.3af )
(£ Page 14).
However, in the following cases you must connect the device to the mains power supply:
u If you connect the device to the local network using WLAN
u If you connect additional extension modules to the device (£ Page 17).
The power adapter is supplied with three different plug-in modules for Europe, Great Britain and the USA. First attach the appropriate plug-in module to the power supply unit.
15
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Europe
1
USA
2
Geat Britain
§§1§§ Slide the required plug-in module into the recess on the underside of the power sup-
ply unit until it clicks into place.
§§2§§ To remove the plug-in module again, press on the button marked Push and pull the
plug-in module out of the power supply unit.
2
3
1
§§1§§ Connect the power adapter to the port on the rear of the phone.
§§2§§ Then insert the plug into the mains socket.
Warning
Use only the power adapter supplied.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Please note
You can safeguard your device against theft by fitting a Kensington lock. The corresponding hole can be found on the rear of the device (§§3§§).
16
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Connecting extension modules (optional)
You can increase the number of programmable keys using extension modules (max.
three; can be ordered as accessories £ Page 173). Each module includes 14 additional
programmable keys. The function keys can be programmed using the Web configurator
(£ Page 151).
Extension module
The package contains:
One extension module
One connection frame with four fastening screws
One connection cable
Insert strips
u
u
u
u
1
3
2
Extension module
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO
§§1§§ Position the extension module to the right of the phone (on left when viewed from be-
low), so that the module and phone are the same height and meet in the centre.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§2§§ Insert the clasps on the connection frame into the respective notches on the phone
and module and push the connection frame upwards until it clicks into place. Secure
the connection frame with the screws provided.
§§3§§ Establish the connections using the cable supplied.
17
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Setting up the device (for the first time)
Your device will start automatically as soon as it is connected to the mains power supply.
Please be aware that the device is powered by PoE (Power over Ethernet). This means that
it is supplied with power as soon as it is connected to an Ethernet switch with PoE-functionality.
The first time you use the device, an installation wizard will start automatically and guide
you through the necessary installation steps.
Configuring language and time zone settings
¤ Use the navigation key to select the
Select your Language
English
Deutsch
Francais
Italiano
Espanol
Portugues
Nederlands
¤
OK
Select your Time Zone
GMT: Dublin, London
GMT+1: Amsterdam, Berlin, ...
GMT+2: Athens, Cairo, Israel
GMT+3: Bagdahd, Kuweit ...
GMT+4: Abu Dhabi, Mucat
GMT+5: Islamabad, Karachi
GMT+6: Dhaka, Colombo
OK
required language. To do this, press
up or down on the navigation key q.
Further information about the navigation key can be found on
£ Page 24.
Press the display key under §OK§ to
confirm your selection.
You can also use the OK function on
the navigation key (by pressing ‰ in
the centre of the key).
¤ Use the navigation key to select the
required time zone.
¤ Press the display key under §OK§ to
confirm your selection.
When you have made your selection, press the end key I to return to the last entry
screen. You can correct your selection if necessary.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Please note
The date and time are automatically set by a time server. You can select a time server
using the Web configurator or deactivate this function (£ Page 153).
18
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Establishing a connection to the local network/WLAN
Your phone must be connected to the local network before it can connect to the Internet
and before you can operate it from a PC.
The device checks to see if a network connection already exists. The network connection
is automatically established if the phone has automatically been assigned an IP address
from a DHCP server in the network. If this is the case, the following screen will not appear
and you can skip to £ Page 20.
Please note
The following network configuration is the default setting on your device: LAN with IP
protocol version 4 (IPv4) and DHCP.
If your phone has no network connection, you will need to configure the network manually. Depending on the type of network, you will need the following information about
the configuration:
u If the network uses IP protocol version 4 (IPv4) with a static IP address, you will need:
The device IP address, the network subnet mask, the IP addresses of the standard gateway and DNS server.
u If the network uses IP protocol version 6 (IPv6):
IP addresses automatically: select IPv6 as Network Type. The connection is then established automatically.
IP addresses statically: the device IP address, the address prefix length and the DNS
server IP address.
u If you are using the wireless local network (WLAN), you will need:
The name of the WLAN with which you wish to connect the phone (SSID), network key
If there is still no network connection, you will then be asked whether you wish to configure the connection manually.
¤ Select §§Yes§§ if you have the required information.
¤ Select §§No§§ if you want to use the display menu to configure the network at a later date
(£ Page 82).
If you selected §§Yes§§§, you can configure
the network immediately.
Depending on your selection, additional
screens may be displayed so you can
enter the required information.
More detailed information on LAN/
WLAN configuration can be found on
£ Page 82.
Local Network
Network Type
IPv4
Activated Network:
LAN
IP Address Type:
Static
IP Address:
Back
Save
¤ Once you have configured the set-
Version 2, 27.05.2010
tings, press the display key under
§§Save§§.
Your device is now connected to the local network and can be configured for Internet
telephony.
19
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Configuring Internet telephony
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Before you can use the Internet to phone anyone over the Internet, the fixed line network
or the mobile phone network, you need the services of a VoIP provider.
Prerequisite:
– You have a phone system in your network that provides VoIP accounts for your
device, or
– You have registered with a VoIP provider (e.g., via your PC) and set up a VoIP
account.
The device searches the network for a provisioning file and checks whether VoIP accounts
already exist. If the telephone has existing VoIP accounts, these accounts are configured
automatically. You can now make calls with your phone via the Internet.
If the telephone has no existing VoIP accounts, you must configure them manually. The
Web configurator's installation wizard will help you with this (£ Page 108).
20
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / starting.fm / 11/4/10
First steps
Proceeding
Now you have successfully set up your phone, you can adapt it to your personal requirements. Use the following guide to quickly locate the most important topics.
If you are unfamiliar with menu-driven devices such as other Gigaset telephones, you
should first read the section entitled Using the phone on Page 22.
Information on ...
... is located here.
Operating the phone via the keypad and display menu
U
Page 22
Making calls
U
Page 30
Setting up and using directories
U
Page 47
Displaying Internet services
U
Page 67
Setting ringers
U
Page 71
Setting the idle display and screensavers
U
Page 74
Connecting a headset or mobile phone
U
Page 88
Loading your own pictures and sounds
U
Page 97
Setting up VoIP accounts
U
Page 108
Version 2, 27.05.2010
If you have any questions about using your phone, please read the tips on
troubleshooting (Page 164) or contact our Customer Care team (£ Page 164).
21
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
Using the phone
You have a range of options for operating and configuring your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO in
a way that is convenient for you. For example, you can initiate a phone call or conference
call using the phone's keypad and display menu. You can change your configuration settings using the display menu or the Web configurator.
The option you choose will depend on the situation.
Operating via the keypad and display menu
Display and display keys
The display gives you quick access to all the functions on your phone, particularly the
menu functions.
In idle status, icons on the display indicate the status of your phone (£ Page 4). Alternatively, you can select the information you wish to display, e.g., time, calendar or pictures
(£ Page 74).
Use the display keys to activate the phone's functions and to navigate through the menu.
Different functions are available depending on the operating situation. These functions
are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Example:
Back
OK
Current display key functions
Display keys
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Some important display keys:
§§Options§§
Open a menu for further functions.
§§OK§§
Confirm selection.
Delete key: Delete one character at a time from right to left.
Û
§§Back§§
Skip back one menu level or cancel the operation.
§§Save§§
Save entry.
ß
Copy the displayed entry to the directory.
22
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
Writing and editing text
A text editor is provided for entering text via the keypad.
Prepare Dialling
11:45
peter.black@k|
j §k§ l 5
Û
abc
ß
~
Enter the text.
Each key between Q and O is
assigned several letters and digits.
Press the relevant key a certain number
of times to enter a particular character.
For example k = 2 x the 5 key.
The characters available are shown in
the editor field. The highlighted character is inserted to the left of the cursor.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Deleting/correcting characters
Press the display key. The character to the left of the cursor is deleted. Press
Û
and hold to delete the word to the left of the cursor.
Entry mode
A range of entry modes are available depending on the operating situation. The current
mode is displayed on the right-hand side of the editor field.
Abc
Letters, first letter upper case, others lower case, e.g., for entering names.
abc
Lower case only, e.g., for entering e-mail addresses.
123
Digits only for entering numbers.
Switching entry mode
#
Press the hash key. The text entry mode will change.
Moving the cursor
r
Press the navigation key briefly: moves the cursor one character at a time.
Press and hold the navigation key: moves the cursor word by word.
q
Press the navigation key: moves the cursor line by line. The cursor stays in a
horizontal position.
23
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
Entering special characters
*
Press the star key. The table of special characters is displayed.
p
Screensavers
_
;
:
§
% &
,
’
"
=
/
-
+
*
@ ?
.
!
§Insert§
#
¡
{
}
(
)
[
]
<
¥
£
$
€
|
~
^
Back
\
Select the required character.
Press the display key. The
selected character is
inserted at the cursor position.
>
Insert
Navigation key
The navigation key enables you to access important telephone functions quickly. You can use it to scroll through lists and directories with
ease.
In idle status
Open
redial list
Open
main menu
Open
directory
In menus and lists
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Depending on the operating situation:
§§OK§§, §§Yes§§, §§Save§§, §§Select§§ or §§Change§§ .
Copy a number that has been entered or is shown in the display into
the directory.
Press briefly:
Navigate to the line above/below.
Press and hold:
Scroll up/down the list one line at a time.
"Rotate" left or right (key is touch sensitive):
Quickly scroll through the list. Clockwise to scroll down. Anti-clockwise to scroll up.
24
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
In input fields
Move the cursor up/down
line by line
Press briefly:
Move the cursor to the left/right one character at a time.
Press and hold:
Move the cursor to the left/right quickly.
Understanding the navigation key
The following illustrations demonstrate how to use the navigation key:
‰
stuv
w
Press the centre of the navigation key.
Press down/up/left/right on the navigation key.
Rotate the navigation key to scroll quickly up/down a list.
Using the menus
Your telephone's functions are accessed using a menu that has a number of levels.
Opening the main menu
¤ When the phone is in idle status, press the centre of the navigation key ‰.
The display menu functions are shown as
a list with the respective icons.
An orange box identifies the selected
function.
Select Services
Additional Features
Organizer
Messages
Call Lists
Contacts
Settings
Back
OK
Accessing a function or opening the corresponding submenu
¤ Navigate to the required entry using the navigation key q and press the §OK§ display
key or the ‰ navigation key.
Back to the previous level
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Press the §Back§ display key or briefly press the end key I.
The current operation is cancelled and you will return to the previous menu level.
You can revert to idle status from the main menu.
25
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
Reverting to idle status
You can revert to idle status from anywhere in the display menu as follows:
¤ Press and hold the end key I.
Or:
¤ Do not press any key: After 3 minutes the display will automatically revert to idle
status.
Settings that have not been saved by selecting the display keys §OK§, §Yes§, §Save§ or §Change§
or the navigation key ‰ are lost.
Scrolling through lists
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Copy to Directory
Adam
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Forster, Fred
Judy
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Back
If it is not possible to view all of the functions/list entries at the same time (list is
too long), arrows appear on the righthand side. The arrows indicate the direction in which you need to scroll to view
the rest of the entries in the list.
OK
26
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
Understanding the operating steps
The operating steps used to navigate through the display menu are shown in abbreviated
form.
For example, setting the ringer volume
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Audio Settings ¢ Ringer Settings
¢ Volume
means:
¤ Press the centre of the navigation key
to open the main menu.
¤ Navigate up/down using the navigation key q until the Settings submenu is selected.
Select Services
Additional Features
Organizer
Messages
Call Lists
Contacts
Settings
Back
OK
¤ Press the display key §OK§ to confirm
your selection.
¤ Continue to navigate through the menu
Settings
using the navigation and display key until
you reach the Volume submenu.
Date / Time
Audio Settings
Display
Language
Connectivity
Reset
Audio Settings
Ringer Settings
Advisory Tones
Ringer Settings
Back
Volume
Melodies
Time Control
Anon. Call Silencing
OK
OK
Volume
Back
Calls:
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
Back
OK
Save
27
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
Menu tree
The following menu tree shows all the components of the display menu.
Select Services
Next Call anonymous
All Calls anonymous
Call Divert
Call Waiting
Ringback off
Additional Features Internet Radio
Resource Directory
£ Page 37
£ Page 37
£ Page 42
£ Page 38
£ Page 33
£ Page 67
Screensavers
Caller Pictures
Sounds
Capacity
Organizer
Calendar
Alarm Clock
Missed Alarms
Messages
Voice Mail
Call Records
E-mail
Call Lists
All Calls
Outgoing Calls
Accepted Calls
Missed Calls
Contacts
Directory
USB Directory
LDAP Directory
Online directories
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Settings
£ Page 63
£ Page 65
£ Page 64
£ Page 57
£ Page 58
£ Page 59
£ Page 43
£ Page 43
£ Page 43
£ Page 43
£ Page 47
£ Page 51
£ Page 52
£ Page 53
¢ continues on the next page
£ Page 98
£ Page 99
£ Page 100
£ Page 101
You can choose any name
The name of these menu entries
depends on Web configurator
Page 148.
settings
£
28
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / using.fm / 11/4/10
Using the phone
Settings
Date / Time
£ Page 70
Audio Settings
Ringer Settings
Volume
Melodies
Time Control
Advisory Tones
£ Page 73
Display
Idle Display
Backlight
Language
£ Page 81
£ Page 74
£ Page 78
£ Page 80
Connectivity
Bluetooth
Activation
Screensaver
DECT
Local Network
USB
Reset
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Anon. Call Silencing
£ Page 81
£ Page 71
£ Page 71
£ Page 72
£ Page 73
£ Page 92
Search for Device £ Page 93
Known Device
£ Page 94
Own Device
£ Page 95
Activation
£ Page 95
Register Device
£ Page 96
De-register Device £ Page 96
Eco Mode+
£ Page 96
£ Page 83
£ Page 102
29
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Making calls
Calling
You make your calls using the default account if you do not make another selection. The
first account that is created is used as the default account. You can change this using the
Web configurator (£ Page 134).
Selecting VoIP account
If there are several VoIP accounts available on your device, you can select the
account you wish to use for the call.
§§Select Line§§ Press the display key.
q
Select the required account.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
Call
Select Line
Entering a number using the keypad
You make a call using the phone's receiver, speaker kit or a connected headset
(£ Page 88).
~
Enter the phone number.
c
Lift the receiver.
Or
c
Lift the receiver.
~
Enter the phone number.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key.
The number is dialled.
The duration of the call is shown while the call is in progress.
Instead of putting the receiver to your ear:
A
B
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Press the speaker key to make a call via the speaker.
Press the headset key to make a call via the headset.
You can also switch at any time during the call. Throughout the whole of this section, the
c icon can always represent either A or B.
30
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
When entering the phone number:
Û
Press the display key to delete incorrectly entered figures to the left of the
cursor.
ß
Press the display key to copy entered phone numbers to the local directory
(£ Page 47).
I
Press the end key to cancel dialling.
Dialling a number from the directory
You can save up to 500 entries (vCards) in the local directory. You can create directory
entries and manage them using the phone's display menu (£ Page 47).
To dial a number proceed as follows:
Z
Open the directory using the navigation key s.
Or use the display menu
‰ ¢ Contacts ¢ Directory
B
C
D
E
Adam
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
F
Forster, Fred
G
H
I
J
Judy
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Version 2, 27.05.2010
View
q
c
q
Options
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
Press U to show the details for the
entry.
Lift the receiver. The number is
dialled.
If more than one number is
assigned to the entry, select the
required number. If you do not
select a number, the default phone
number will be dialled after a brief
period.
31
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Dialling a number using a function key
You can assign phone numbers to up to 14 function keys; you then only need to press a
key once to dial the number. You can increase the number of function keys by connecting
extension modules. Use the Web configurator to assign numbers to the function keys
(£ Page 151).
S
Press the function key.
The number assigned to the function key is dialled.
Dialling a number from the call lists
The following calls are saved:
u Outgoing calls (redial list)
u Accepted calls
u Missed calls
The last 30 numbers are stored in each of the call lists. The name will appear on the display
if you have saved the number in the directory.
You can browse through the entries and dial directly from within the record.
If there are new entries in the missed calls list, the Message Centre key E flashes.
To save numbers from a list in the directory, see (£ Page 43).
Viewing call lists and dialling numbers
Open the required call list:
È
Open the redial list using the navigation key t.
E
Open the list of missed messages in the Message Centre.
Or use the display menu
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ All Calls
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ Outgoing Calls
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ Missed Calls
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ Accepted Calls
The last (most recent) call or dialled phone number is shown on the display.
All Calls
š Brown, Tim
via §§1§§Account1
1/30
q
c
Select another entry if necessary.
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
Today, 00:07 Duration 00:05:20
š Brown, Tim
via §§1§§MyOffice
01.05.10, 12:20
™ Miller, Peter
Version 2, 27.05.2010
View
Options
32
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Initiating ringback
Ringback is automatically initiated if the number you have called is busy. Prerequisite:
This function is not deactivated and is supported by your phone system or your provider.
The ringback function is activated as soon as you put down the receiver or if the connection is not established after 10 seconds. Ringback is initiated as soon as the line is free
again.
Activating/deactivating ringback
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can deactivate the ringback function for all of the VoIP accounts configured on your
phone or just for certain VoIP accounts. The setting applies to both incoming and outgoing calls on this account.
‰ ¢ Select Services ¢ Ringback off
Accounts for which ringback is permitted are marked with a tick.
q
Dial the required entry.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to set or remove a tick.
33
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Receiving incoming calls
You hear the ringer and the speaker key A flashes. If a headset is connected, the headset key B also flashes.
If the call is received on one of the phone numbers programmed on a function key, this
function key S flashes.
Brown, Tim
l 1234567890
ã §§1§§ Account1
08:00 Amsterdam
Reject
Silence
The display shows the caller's number
(where calling line identification is permitted £ Page 37) and their name, if
they are saved in the directory. If a picture is assigned to the caller, this will also
appear.
The account that the call is received on is
also shown.
c
Lift the receiver. You can
speak to the caller.
Please note
When you receive a call, the phone first of all searches for a corresponding entry in the
local directory. If the number doesn't appear there, the other directories are searched
(if configured) (£ Page 148).
Deactivating the ringer
§§Silence§§
Press the display key to deactivate the ringer. You can then decide whether
to accept or reject the call.
Rejecting a call
§§Reject§§
Press the display key or the end key I to reject the call.
Ending a call
Version 2, 27.05.2010
&
Put down the receiver or press the end key I.
34
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Using functions when making a telephone call
Display when establishing a connection or during a call
z
The display shows
Connection
09:13
via §§1§§ Account1 ¯
11:45
Brown, Tim
ä1234567890
Info
W
u The VoIP account you are using to
make the call.
The ¯ icon next to the account
description indicates that it is an
encrypted connection.
u The caller's number (where calling line
identification is permitted
£ Page 37) and their name, if they
are saved in the directory. If a picture
is assigned to the caller, this will also
appear.
Connection icon. This indicates the status of the connection.
z
W
Establishing a connection
Connection established
X
œ
Connection interrupted
Conference call
HDSP in the screen picture indicates a connection with the highest voice
quality.
09:13
§§Info§§
The duration of the call is displayed under the screen picture.
Press the display key to view technical information about the phone. This
function is helpful when calling the Service Hotline, for example.
Adjusting the volume
You can adjust the volume of the receiver, speaker kit or headset during a call. You can
adjust the volume of the ringer while the phone is ringing.
H
To decrease the volume press the left side of the key and to increase the volume press the right side of the key. Each time you press the key, the volume
will increase or decrease by one level.
There are ten volume settings available. The current setting is shown on the
display.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The last setting is saved when you change the ringer volume.
Use the display menu to permanently configure the ringer melody and volume
(£ Page 71).
35
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Muting
You can deactivate the microphone for the receiver, the speaker kit and the headset. The
other party can then no longer hear you.
C
Press the mute key during the phone call.
Press the key again to reactivate the microphone.
The C key is lit up while the function is activated.
Activating/deactivating speaker mode
Activating via the receiver during a call:
A & Press the speaker key and put down the receiver.
The A key is lit up while the function is activated.
In speaker mode, you hear the caller via the speaker.
Deactivating speaker mode during a call:
c
Lift the receiver. Continue the call via the receiver.
Please note
You should tell your caller if you have activated the speaker.
Do not disturb
You can activate the Do Not Disturb (DND) function if you do not want to receive any calls
and you do not want the phone to ring.
You can still make calls when this function is activated.
G
Press the Do Not Disturb key.
Press the same key again to deactivate the function.
The G key is lit up while the function is activated.
Please note
£
u You can permanently deactivate the ringer for anonymous calls ( Page 73).
u You can use the Web configurator to create a blacklist of unwanted names and
Version 2, 27.05.2010
numbers (£ Page 141). Once you activate the blacklist function, calls from these
numbers will not be put through.
36
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Two-way recording
You can record your two-way telephone conversations.
F
Press the call records key.
Press the key again to end the call record.
The F key is lit up while the function is activated.
The phone memory can store two-way call records of up to 30 minutes. If you want to
record two-way calls for longer than 30 minutes, you can connect a USB storage device
(£ Page 102). The Ý USB icon flashes on the display while a two-way call is being
recorded to the USB device. Calls can also be recorded onto a server (£ Page 141).
Go into the display menu to play back and delete two-way call recordings Messages
¢ Call Records (£ Page 58).
Please note
u Conference calls cannot be recorded.
u You should tell your caller if you are recording a two-way conversation.
Anonymous calling – withholding caller ID
You can make anonymous calls (CLIR = Calling Line Identification Restriction). Your phone
number will not be displayed when making outgoing calls. You are calling anonymously.
Prerequisite: Anonymous calls are only possible via VoIP connections through providers
that support the "anonymous calling" function. You may have to ask your VoIP provider
to activate this function.
Making an anonymous call
Select:
‰ ¢ Select Services ¢ Next Call anonymous
Then proceed as normal:
~
Enter the phone number.
c
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled. Your number is not transferred.
Activating/deactivating "anonymous calling" for all calls
You can permanently activate/deactivate the anonymous call function for all of the VoIP
accounts configured on your phone or just for certain accounts. The anonymous call function is activated for the phone and any handset that is registered.
‰ ¢ Select Services ¢ All Calls anonymous
Accounts for which anonymous calling is permitted are marked with a tick.
q
Dial the required entry.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Change§§
Press the display key to tick the box.
Press the display key again to remove the tick.
37
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Making a call to multiple participants
Initiating a consultation call
During a call, you want to consult a second participant.
J
Press the consultation call key during the call.
The call is placed on hold. You can make another call to a second participant. Once the call
has ended, press the consultation key again. You are reconnected to the first participant.
Accepting/rejecting call waiting
You hear the call waiting tone during a phone call.
The display shows the caller's number
(where calling line identification is permitted £ Page 37) and their name, if
they are saved in the directory.
The display also shows the subscriber
number used to receive the call and indicates whether this is a ringback.
Ù
Ø
Tim Brown
1234567890
lã §§1§§ Account1
Accept
Reject
Accepting a call:
§§Accept§§
Press the display key to accept the call.
W
Call Swap
11:45
via §§1§§ Account1
...90987654321
09:13
à
Remove
0981234567890
You are connected to the waiting participant.
The first participant hears music on hold.
The number is displayed and the à icon
identifies it as the waiting participant.
q
Select the connection.
§§Remove§§
Press the display key to end
the selected connection.
Add Particip.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Rejecting a call:
§§Reject§§
Press the display key to reject the waiting call.
38
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Activating/deactivating call waiting
You can deactivate call waiting during a call for all of the accounts configured on your
phone or just for certain accounts.
‰ ¢ Select Services ¢ Call Waiting
Accounts for which call waiting is permitted are marked with a tick. Callers via other
accounts hear the busy tone.
q
Dial the required entry.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to tick the box.
Press the display key again to remove the tick.
Call swapping
You are speaking to one participant and a second is on hold; this may be because you
have accepted a waiting call or have placed one caller on hold.
J
Press the consultation call key to swap from one caller to the other.
Initiating a consultation call with a third participant:
§§Add Particip.§§
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Press the display key. Both participants are placed on hold.
~
Enter the phone number for the third participant or select from the directory.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key or wait for 3 seconds. The number is dialled.
To speak to one of the participants on hold again after you have finished the ringback:
q
Select the relevant participant.
J
Press the ringback key.
39
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Initiating a conference
You are speaking to one participant while another is on hold.
q
Select the participant who is on hold.
K
Press the conference key to add the waiting participant to a conference.
Or
You are speaking to one or more participants and you wish to add an additional participant.
K
Press the conference key.
~
Enter the phone number for the additional participant or select from the
directory.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key. The number is dialled.
As soon as the participant answers, they are automatically connected to the conference
call.
œ
Conference
09:13
11:45
...90987654321
0981234567890
...981234567890
Remove
All the participants in the conference are
listed on the display.
Removing a participant from the conference call:
q
Select the participant.
§§Remove§§
Press the display key to end
the conference for the highlighted participant.
Add Particip.
§§Add Particip.§§
Press the display key to begin a consultation call with another participant. In
contrast to conference key K. The conference participants are put on
hold.
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Only participants who share the same VoIP account can participate in a conference
call.
40
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Transferring a call to another number
You are speaking to one participant and you want to transfer the call to a third participant.
Transfer without consultation:
L
Press the transfer key. The call is placed on hold.
~
Enter the phone number for the participant to whom you want to transfer the
call.
L
Press the transfer key again. The call is transferred to the number you have
dialled. Your connection to the participant is ended.
Transfer with consultation:
Use this function to ensure that the connection is actually established.
L
Press the transfer key. The call is placed on hold.
~
Enter the phone number for the participant to whom you want to transfer the
call.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key. The number is dialled.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can now hang up or press the transfer key L to forward the call.
When you call the third participant you can also wait for them to answer and speak to
them, for instance to tell them you are forwarding a call. Then press the transfer key L.
Transfer to participants on hold:
You are speaking to one participant and there are others on hold. You can transfer the current call to one of the participants on hold.
q
Select one of the participants on hold.
L
Press the transfer key. The chosen participant is connected to the person you
are currently speaking to.
41
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / telephony.fm / 11/4/10
Making calls
Setting up call divert (CD)
When you divert a call, the call is forwarded to another connection. Your call divert settings can be specific to a particular connection (i.e., settings for each configured VoIP
account). Prerequisite: The VoIP provider supports call divert.
‰ ¢ Select Services ¢ Call Divert
The list contains the accounts configured on your telephone.
q
Select the required account.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to confirm the selection.
§§1§§Account1
Call Divert
r
Switch Activation on/off.
~
Select the entry To Phone
Number.
Enter the phone number to which
the call should be diverted.
s
r
Select the entry When.
Select when the call divert is to
apply:
s
Activation:
On
To Phone Number:
When:
All Calls
Back
All Calls
No Answer
When Busy
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Save§§
Save
All calls are diverted.
Calls are diverted if no one accepts the call within several rings.
Calls are diverted if your line is busy.
Press the display key to save the settings for this account.
42
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using the call lists
Using the call lists
The following call lists are available:
All Calls
Outgoing Calls
Accepted Calls
Missed Calls
All outgoing, accepted and missed calls.
Last dialled numbers (redial list).
Calls that were accepted.
Calls that were not answered.
If the list contains entries that you have not yet viewed, the display shows the ™ icon and the number of new entries. You can
also access the list via the Message Centre (£ Page 62).
A maximum of 30 entries is saved in the lists. The next entry overwrites the oldest one.
You can access all of the lists via the display menu.
Viewing entries
You can open a list when the telephone is in idle status via the display menu.
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ All Calls
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ Outgoing Calls
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ Accepted Calls
‰ ¢ Call Lists ¢ Missed Calls
All Calls
1/30
š Brown, Tim
via §§1§§Account1
Today, 00:07 Duration 00:05:20
š Brown, Tim
via §§1§§MyOffice
01.05.10, 12:20
™ Black, Susan
View
Options
The calls are displayed in chronological
order, from the most recent through to
the oldest.
The number of the selected entry and the
total number of entries in the list (e.g., 1/
30) is displayed in the top right corner.
An icon is shown in front of each entry to
indicate whether it is an outgoing (š),
accepted (›) or missed (™) call.
Information on the entry:
u Phone number of the caller/called party. If the number is saved in the directory, the
name is displayed instead.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
u VoIP account on which the call was made/received.
u Date and time of the call. Outgoing calls also include the duration of the connection.
The information displayed is determined by the information transferred by the caller and
whether or not the caller appears in the directory.
If the caller has activated CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation), the caller's phone
number is identified. The caller can then be identified by this number if he or she is
already saved in the directory. Prerequisite: The feature is activated for the VoIP account.
43
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using the call lists
Displaying detailed information
§§View§§
Press the display key. The information available is displayed, with the phone
number as a minimum.
If the number is saved in the directory,
the directory entry is displayed
(£ Page 47).
Susan Black
Teacher
School
•
ä
k
l
l
»
Å
Ð
+377(098)1234567890
+345(678)345621
+49(698)987654321
+471(076)4567890123
Back
Dial
Please note
When you receive a call, the phone first of all searches for a corresponding entry in the
local directory. If the number doesn't appear there, the other directories are searched
(if configured) (£ Page 148).
Dialling a number from a list
You have the following options for dialling a phone number from a list:
All Calls
š Brown, Tim
via §§1§§Account1
1/30
Today 00:07 Duration 00:05:20
š Brown, Tim
q
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
c Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
via §§1§§MyOffice
01.05.10, 12:20
™ Black, Susan
Version 2, 27.05.2010
View
Options
44
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using the call lists
Or
q
§§View§§
•
c
+49(123)1234567890
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
Press the display key to show
the entry.
Lift the receiver.
Or
§§Dial§§
Press the display key.
The number is dialled.
Back
Dial
Copying an entry from the call list to the directory.
q
All Calls
š 00991234567890
§§Options§§
q
via §§1§§Account1
Copy to Directory
Delete Entry
Delete List
Back
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Copy to Directory
<New Entry>
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Forster, Fred
Judy
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Back
§§OK§§
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
Press the display key.
Select the Copy to Directory
entry.
Press the display key to confirm the action.
OK
The directory is opened.
You can create a new entry in the directory or edit an existing one.
See directory £ Page 48.
OK
45
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using the call lists
Deleting an entry or list
§§Options§§
q
Press the display key.
Select the required action:
Delete Entry or Delete List
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action.
You must confirm the action again.
All Calls
š 00991234567890
via §§1§§Account1
Copy to Directory
Delete Entry
Delete List
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
OK
46
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Using directories
The options are:
u Local directory
u Directory on USB storage device £ Page 51
u LDAP directory £ Page 52
u Personal or public online directory £ Page 53
Please note
The default directory is the local directory. This is the directory that you can open with
the Z key and the directory to which entries are saved using the "Copy to Directory"
function.
You can set a different directory as the default directory via the Web configurator
(£ Page 151).
Using the local directory
You can save a total of 500 entries in the local directory. You can expand this number to
an almost unlimited degree by connecting a USB stick.
Directory entries are saved in the form of vCards. These are virtual business cards for
exchanging contact information (file extension .vcf ). You can assign a picture to a directory entry. This must be held in the phone's resource directory (£ Page 99).
You create a personalised directory. If you move workstations, you can save your directory
on a USB stick and access it from another phone (£ Page 128).
Directory entries
Susan Black
Teacher
School
•
ä
k
l
l
»
Å
Ð
+377(098)1234567890
+345(678)345621
+49(698)987654321
+471(076)4567890123
Edit
V
Delete
A directory entry contains the following
information:
u First name, surname, picture
u Up to seven phone numbers
u E-mail address, Web address, fax
number
u Job title/position, company, address
u Birthday, time zone, further information
Version 2, 27.05.2010
An icon in front of a phone number indicates whether it is a home (ä), office (k) or
mobile number (l).
47
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Opening the directory
Open the directory in idle status or during an external call with the Z key (navigation key
s)
Or use the display menu
‰ ¢ Contacts ¢ Directory
Displaying an entry
q
§§View§§
A
Adam
B
C
D
E
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Forster, Fred
V
View
Options
U
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
Press the display key. The
entry is shown with all tabs
as in the illustration on
Page 47.
Press the arrow to the right
of the entry. The entry will be
shown as an overview
screen.
Creating a new entry
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
Press the display key to start the New Entry action.
Each directory entry has five tabs.
r Scroll from tab to tab.
q Navigate to the required field or to the rab level.
§§OK§§
New Entry
_
•
»
Å
Tab 1: Entering the name
~ Enter the Name and First Name.
For information on entering text
£ Page 23.
Ð
First Name:
Surname:
Picture:
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
Abc V
Save
48
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
New Entry
_
•
»
Å
Ð
W
Forster
Picture:
T
U
forster_fred
View
Save
New Entry
_
•
»
Å
Ð
Type:
T Office
U
New Number:
Default No:
V
No
Back
Save
New Entry
_
•
»
Å
Ð
Birthday:
01.09.1982
Reminder:
Off
Time Zone:
GMT+1: Amsterdam, Berlin, ...
Back
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Save§
Save
V
Assigning a picture:
If you wish to assign a personal picture, it
must be saved in the phone's resource
directory (£ Page 99).
As soon as you select the Picture field,
the first available picture is shown.
r
Scroll through the list.
‰
Select the required picture.
§View§§
Show the picture in the display size.
Tab 2: Entering the phone number
You can enter up to seven phone numbers. One of the phone numbers must be
assigned as the default phone number
(£ Page 50).
q Select the New Number entry.
§§OK§§ Confirm the selection.
r Select the type (Office/Home/
Mobile /URI),
~ Enter the phone number.
r Select the Yes option in the
Default Number field if this is to be
the default phone number.
The following information can be saved
in the other tabs:
Tab 3:
E-mail, Web Address, Fax
Tab 4:
Job Title, Company, Street,
City, ZIP, Country
Tab 5:
Birthday, Reminder, Time
Zone, Notes
If you activate the Reminder function,
the birthday will be shown as an alarm
on the display (£ Page 64).
Save the directory entry if you have entered all the data.
49
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Editing entries
Susan Black
_
•
»
q
Å
Ð
First Name:
Susan
Surname:
Black
Picture:
Back
Abc V
Save
Scroll to the required directory entry.
§§Options§§
Press the display key
q
Select Edit Entry.
Directory entry fields can be edited. The
procedure is the same as for Creating a
new entry.
Changing the default number
The default phone number is the first number in the participant's list and is dialled first.
You can change the default phone number.
q
Change Default No.
+377(098)1234567890
+345(678)345621
+49(698)987654321
+471(076)4567890123
§§Options§§
q
§§§OK§§
q
§§§OK§§
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
Scroll to the required directory entry.
Press the display key
Select Change Default No..
Confirm the selection.
Select the required number.
Confirm the selection.
OK
50
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Deleting a directory entry or the entire directory
Deleting a selected entry from the list:
q
Scroll to the required entry.
§§Options§§
Press the display key
q
Select Delete Entry.
§§§OK§§
Confirm the selection.
Or
§§View§§ ¢
§§Delete§§ Press the display keys in sequence.
§Yes§
Confirm the deletion.
Deleting the entire list:
§§Options§§
Press the display key
q
Select Delete List.
§Yes§
Confirm the deletion.
Selecting a number from the directory
q
Scroll to the required entry.
c
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
If several numbers are saved on the vCard, a list of numbers is displayed once the receiver
is lifted. If you do not select a number, the default phone number will be dialled after a
brief period (£ Page 50).
Using your local directory on a USB stick
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can save your local directory on a USB stick and use it on every Gigaset DE900 IP PRO.
You use a directory on a USB stick in the same way as your local directory (£ Page 47).
The maximum number of entries is only restricted by the memory of the USB stick (max.
16 GB). When you plug the USB stick in, it is automatically recognised and the data is available on the phone.
You save your local directory via the Web configurator (£ Page 127).
51
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Using an LDAP directory
If your corporate network provides a directory via an LDAP server, you can access this on
your phone (LDAP = Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). Prerequisite: You have set
up this function via the Web configurator (£ Page 150).
You can give the LDAP directory a name in the Web configurator. This will then appear in
the display in place of LDAP Directory.
Opening an LDAP directory
You can open the LDAP directory in idle status via the display menu
‰ ¢ Contacts ¢ LDAP Directory
Or
Z
Press and hold (navigation key s .
Searching for and displaying an entry
~
A
B
C
D
E
F
åU
B
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Burger, Mary
V
Û
View
Enter the name (or first few letters).
For information on entering text
£ Page 23
The search will automatically start as
soon as you stop inputting characters.
All matching entries are displayed. The
search field is displayed again if no
matching entries are found. You can start
a new search.
q
Scroll to the required entry.
§§View§§
Press the display key.
The entry will be displayed.
Dialling from the LDAP directory
Display the entry.
Susan Black
§§Dial§§
Teacher
School
Or
•
ä
k
l
l
»
c
Ð
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
+377(098)1234567890
+345(678)345621
+49(698)987654321
+471(076)4567890123
Back
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Å
Press the display key
V
Dial
52
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Using online directories
Online directories are available on the Internet. You can:
u Use public online directories that are available on the Internet, such as KlickTel or the
Yellow Pages and
u Create a personal online directory if your provider permits this.
Select which public online directory you want to use via the Web configurator
(£ Page 148).
u White Pages
a public directory provided on the Internet
u Yellow Pages
yellow pages provided on the Internet
u Private NetDirectory
Some providers offer users the option of creating and managing a personal online
directory on the Internet.
You can use the personal online directory on your phone.
Prerequisite:
– You enter the data for the provider of your personal online directory in the Web
configurator (£ Page 148)
– You must create and manage your personal online directory using your PC's Web
browser.
Opening a online directory
You can open a online directory in idle status via the display menu
‰ ¢ Contacts ¢ Name of directory
Select the required public or private online directory. The directory name depends on the
settings for the directory in the Web configurator. It can be the name the provider uses for
their directory or a name you have chosen yourself.
Searching for an entry in the online directory
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can search for a phone number or a name. Provided that you haven't entered a search
criterion, you can switch between a §§Name Search§§ and a §§Number Search§§.
53
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Searching for a number
Online
~
Enter the surname and city of the
subscriber you are looking for.
For information on entering text
£ Page 23
Number Search
Surname:
B|
City:
Berlin
Paris
Abc V
A §B§ C 2
Name Search
Online
Number Search
W
City:
H|
Berlin
Paris
Roma
London
Abc V
G §H§ I 4
Û
Search
The last five locations for which you have
carried out a search are displayed in the
City field. You can select one of these
instead of entering a city via the keypad.
§§Search§§
Press the display key to start
the search.
If several entries are found for the city, a
list is displayed so that you can narrow
down the location search.
Please note: The City field is not available
in the private directory.
Searching for a name
§§Name Search§§
Online
Number:
Name Search
123|
~
§§Search§§
Press the display key.
Enter the number for the
entry you are searching for.
Press the display key to start
the search.
123
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Number Search
Search
A message is displayed if no entry is found. You can then:
§§Change§§
Press the display key to change your search request.
Or
§New Search§§ Press the display key to start a new search.
54
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Search results
Online
W
Brown, Albert
Place 1, 12345 London
Brown, Albert
Street 2, 67890 London
Brown, Andrew
Road 3, 23456 London
Brown, Antony
View
Refined Search
V
Specify your search request in the various
fields.
Surname, First name, Category/Name or
Street.
§§Search§§
Press the display key to
restart the search.
Online
Surname:
Brown
First Name:
Su|
abc V
T §U§ V 8
Û
Search
Online
• Å
ä +377(098)1234567890
k +345(678)345621
l +49(698)987654321
Version 2, 27.05.2010
ß
Search results are displayed as a list.
If more than 99 entries are found, a message including the number of results
found is displayed. You can then refine
the search or request for the entire list to
be displayed.
Refining a search:
§§Refined Search§§Press the display key.
New Search
Displaying entry details:
q
Scroll to the required entry.
§§View§§
Press the display key.
The tabs contain the available phone
numbers and address information.
r
Scroll from tab to tab.
Dialling a number:
q
Select the number.
~
Lift the receiver.
55
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 11/4/10
Using directories
Transferring a number to the local directory
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Copy to Directory
<New Entry>
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Forster, Fred
Judy
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Back
You can transfer entries from a online
directory to your local directory.
ßPress the display key.
You can create a new entry in the directory or edit an existing one.
See directory £ Page 48.
OK
56
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing messages
Managing messages
You can access the following message types via the display menu:
u Voice mails on network mailboxes
u Recorded calls (£ Page 58)
u E-mails (£ Page 59)
The Message Centre also allows you to access voice mails, missed calls, e-mails and
missed alarms at the press of a key (£ Page 62).
Managing voice mails on the network mailbox
Some VoIP providers offer answering machines on the Internet – network mailboxes. Each
network mailbox accepts incoming calls on the corresponding VoIP phone number. You
should therefore set up a network mailbox for each of your VoIP accounts in order to
record all calls (£ Page 142).
If there are new messages on the network mailbox, these are indicated by the à icon.
The number of messages is displayed to the right.
You can also access your network mailbox via the Message Centre (£ Page 62). The E
key flashes if a new message has been received on the network mailbox.
Playing voice mails
Play recorded messages via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Messages ¢ Voice Mail
Play recorded messages via the Message Centre:
E ¢ Voice Mail
A list of available network mailboxes
arranged in order of VoIP accounts is displayed.
q Scroll through the list to the
required network mailbox.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to establish a
connection with the network mailbox.
Voice Mail
§1§ Account1
2 old messages
§3§ Account3
3 new messages
§4§ Account4
7 old messages
§5§ Account5
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
OK
57
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing messages
Call records
You can record a two-way telephone conversation (£ Page 37).
The phone saves two-way call records of up to 30 minutes in MP3 format. If you wish to
record two-way calls for longer than 30 minutes, you will need to connect a USB storage
device (£ Page 102). If your network has a server, you can also save call records there.
You can set this up using the Web configurator (£ Page 141).
Playing back call records
You can manage recorded conversations via the display menu.
‰ ¢ Messages ¢ Call Records
If more than one VoIP account is configured on your phone, first select the account. The
call records for this account are displayed.
The call records are displayed in chronological order, from the most recent
through to the oldest.
§§1§§Account1
Call Records
Brown, Tim
14.05.10, 16:27 - 16:30
Miller, Peter
12.05.10, 10:14 - 10:18
Black, Susan
V
10.05.10, 18:20 - 18:22
James
Play
Delete
Playback
Ð
Call Participant: :
Susan Black
Stop
The name of the call participant and the
date/time of the call record are displayed.
If there are several VoIP accounts, the
account is displayed in the top righthand corner.
Playing back a call record:
q
Scroll through the list to the
required call record.
§§Playback§§ Start playback.
The name of the participant will be displayed during playback. The elapsed
time and the total duration of the call
record are displayed in the top right corner.
§§Stop§§
End playback.
§§Pause§§
Cancel playback.
Continue playback with §§Continue§§.
Pause
Version 2, 27.05.2010
By default, call records are played back via the speaker. If a headset is connected, you can
listen to the playback through this. If you pick up the receiver, you can listen to the playback through this.
58
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing messages
Deleting call records
Call Records
q
§§1§§Account1
Brown, Tim
§§Delete§§
14.05.10, 16:27 - 16:30
Miller, Peter
Scroll through the list to the
required call record.
Press the display key to
delete the call record.
12.05.10, 10:14 - 10:18
Black, Susan
V
10.05.10, 18:20 - 18:22
James
Play
Delete
Managing e-mail messages
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Your phone will notify you when new e-mail messages have been received on your
incoming e-mail server. You can connect to this server and display the sender, date/time
of receipt, subject and body of the message for every message.
Prerequisites:
– You have set up an e-mail account with an ISP.
– The incoming e-mail server uses the POP3 protocol.
– You have set up the name of the incoming e-mail server and your personal registration data (account name, password) using the Web configurator (£ Page 115).
New incoming e-mails are indicated by the Ë icon. The number of new e-mails is shown
to the right. If more than 99 e-mails have been received, the number will flash. If no more
capacity is available for e-mails, the e-mail icon will flash red. The maximum capacity is 5
MB.
The phone checks at regular intervals whether new e-mails have been received. You can
set the time intervals via the Web configurator in multiple stages between 15 minutes
and 24 hours (£ Page 142).
You can also access your inbox via the Message Centre (£ Page 62). The E key flashes
if there are new e-mails on the incoming e-mail server.
59
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing messages
Opening the incoming e-mail list
Via the display menu:
Via the Message Centre:
‰ ¢ Messages
E ¢ E-mail
¢ E-mail
The phone will connect to the incoming e-mail server. A list of e-mail messages that are
stored there is displayed.
E-mail
1/2 /
ben.milller@company.com Ë
15.05.10, 10:20
Invitation
Black, Susan
19.05.10, 11:11
Meeting minutes
carlos.alvarez@spec...
View
Ë
Â
Delete
The e-mail messages are displayed in
chronological order, from the most
recent through to the oldest, along with
the following information:
u Name/e-mail address of the sender
(single line; shortened if necessary)
u Date and time (prerequisite for correct details: the sender and recipient
are in the same time zone)
u Subject
New messages are identified by the Ë icon; ones that have already been read are followed by Â. Messages are classed as new if they have been received since the last time
the incoming e-mail list was accessed.
If a new e-mail is selected: The number of the selected new message and the total
number of new messages is displayed in the top right corner.
If an old e-mail is selected: The number of the selected old message and the total
number of old messages is displayed in the top right corner.
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Many e-mail providers activate spam protection measures by default. E-mail messages classified as spam are stored in a separate folder and are therefore not shown in
the incoming e-mail list.
Some e-mail providers allow you to deactivate spam protection or show spam e-mails
in the incoming e-mail list.
Other e-mail providers may send a message to the inbox when a new spam e-mail is
received. This is to inform you that a suspected spam e-mail has been received.
The date and sender of this mail are repeatedly updated, so that it is always displayed
as a new message.
60
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing messages
If establishing a connection fails
If a connection to the incoming e-mail server cannot be established, the No Connection
message is displayed.
This may have the following causes:
– Incorrect entry of incoming e-mail server name (£ Page 115).
– Temporary problems with the incoming e-mail server (server is down or not connected to the Internet).
¤ Check settings.
¤ Try again later.
Reading e-mail messages
E-mail
From:
Subject:
1/22 /
Mail Text ...
Back
Delete
In the opened incoming e-mail list:
§§View§§
Press the display key to display e-mail.
The first 10 KB of an e-mail is downloaded to the phone. The message
header, the message and the name of
any attachments are displayed. The
attachments are not transferred. If the email is longer than 10 KB, the message
cannot be transferred in full and may not
be readable.
Please note
u If the e-mail message contains more than just text, a message to this effect is dis-
played. The subject of the message is then displayed.
u If the subject and/or the message text are formatted in HTML, they are converted
into text format.
Deleting e-mail messages
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The incoming e-mail list is opened (£ Page 60).
q
Select an e-mail entry.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key to delete the e-mail.
Or
If you have opened the e-mail message to read it.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key to delete the e-mail.
The e-mail is deleted from the phone's e-mail list. To delete e-mails from the server as well,
use the Web configurator (£ Page 142).
61
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing messages
Accessing messages via the Message Centre
The Message Centre gives you quick access to newly-received messages at the press of a
key. It provides centralised access to the following messages:
u Voice mails (£ Page 57)
u Missed calls (£ Page 43)
u E-mails (£ Page 59)
u Missed alarms (£ Page 64)
The message key E flashes if a new entry is received for one of these message types. A
new entry is classed as anything that has been received since the corresponding list was
last opened.
You use the Web configurator to specify which message types can be accessed via the
Message Centre (£ Page 144).
Opening the Message Centre
You open the Message Centre with the E key.
The list shows the message types
together with the relevant icon:
Messages & Calls
à §§1§§ Account1
à Network mailbox (with relevant
™ Missed Calls
™ Missed calls
Ë E-mails
n Missed alarms
2 new messages
VoIP account)
8 new calls
Ë E-mail
10 old messages
n Missed Alarms
Back
OK
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The message types that have new messages are displayed first. The number of new messages is displayed if new messages have been received; otherwise the number of old messages is displayed. If a message type contains no messages, it will not be displayed.
To open the list:
q
Scroll to the required message type.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to display the list.
62
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing the calendar and alarms
Managing the calendar and alarms
Alarms include anniversaries (e.g., birthdays). Birthdays that are entered in the directory
(£ Page 49) are automatically recorded in the calendar.
Managing the calendar
You open the calendar via the display menu. You can also display the calendar permanently on the idle display (£ Page 74).
Opening the calendar
‰ ¢ Organizer
May 2010
Mo Tu
17
18 3 4
19 10 11
20 17 18
21 24 25
22 31
View
¢ Calendar
We Th Fr Sa Su
5
12
19
26
6
13
20
27
7
14
21
28
1
8
15
22
29
2
9
16
23
30
Options
16.05.2010
R Mary
12 years
R Susan
35 years
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
Delete
The current month is displayed.
Special days are highlighted.
White box:
Current date
Orange box:
Selected date
Highlighted
Date with assigned
orange:
alarm
If one or more alarms are scheduled on
the same day, you can display these:
p
Navigate to the required
date.
§§View§§
Press the display key.
Please note: Select a date and press the
q key on the upper or lower edge of the
calendar to scroll to the previous or following month.
The alarms for the selected day are displayed with an icon.
R
Birthday/anniversary: Name
as it appears in the directory
entry and age based on the
date of birth
Deleting an entry:
q
Select an entry.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key.
63
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing the calendar and alarms
Displaying alarms
An alarm occurs when the date of an anniversary is reached. Alarms are shown on the idle
display.
ØR
Tim Brown
17.05.2010, 48 years
Displaying a birthday
The date and age based on the date of
birth are displayed.
The display starts at 09:00 on the specified anniversary.
Call
Off
§§Off§§
Press the display key to switch the display off. The display returns to idle status.
§§Call§§
Press the display key to call the participant.
If you do not react to a displayed alarm, the alarm is added to the list of missed alarms
(£ Page 64).
Displaying missed alarms
Alarms that you do not react to are added to the missed alarms list. You can access this via
the display menu or via the Message Centre (£ Page 62).
Via the display menu:
Via the Message Centre:
‰ ¢ Organizer ¢ Missed Alarms
D ¢ Missed Alarms
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Missed alarms are displayed in chronological order, from the most recent through to the
oldest, and are accompanied by an icon.
R Birthday/anniversary: Name as it appears in the directory entry and age based on
the date of birth
The number and status of the entry is displayed in the top right-hand corner.
Missed alarms are classed as new if they have been entered since the last time the list was
accessed.
Deleting an entry:
q
Select an entry.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key.
When you close the list, the status of all entries is set to "old", regardless of whether you
viewed the entry or not.
64
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing the calendar and alarms
Alarm clock function
You can set a signal to wake you at a certain time.
If the alarm clock is activated, the · icon appears. The wake-up time is shown on the
right-hand side (£ Page 4).
The wake-up call will sound at the specified time either Monday to Friday or daily.
Ø·
A wake-up call is signalled on the display
and the selected ringer also rings for
60 seconds.
During a call, a wake-up call is signalled
by an advisory tone.
§§Off§§
Press the display key to deactivate the wake-up call.
07:30
Off
You can manage the alarm clock function via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Organizer ¢ Alarm Clock
Activating/deactivating the alarm clock function
r
Alarm Clock
Activation:
T
On
~
U
Time:
06:00
Occurrence:
Daily
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Volume:
Back
Select On or Off.
Time:
V
Save
Enter the time for the wake-up call
in four-digit format, e.g., 0715 for
07:15 (24-hour format) or 07:15 AM
(12-hour format).
Occurrence:
r Specify on which days the wake-up
call should be activated:
Monday-Friday or Daily.
65
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Managing the calendar and alarms
Setting the volume and ringer
r
Volume:
Alarm Clock
W
Occurrence:
Daily
Volume:
U
T
Signal:
Sound1
Back
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Save§§
Save
Set the volume for the wake-up
call at one of ten levels. The current
setting is displayed graphically.
Signal:
r Set the signal.
All available ringers can be
selected. The selected ringer is
played back.
You can load individual ringers to your
phone (£ Page 100).
Press the display key to save your settings.
66
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Using Internet services
Using Internet services
Use your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO to listen to Internet radio and use Internet info services.
Please note
Internet radio and Internet services can only be accessed if the info services function
has been activated in the Web configurator (£ Page 145).
Listening to Internet radio
Listen to Internet radio on your phone. You can select a list of available radio stations
using the Web configurator (£ Page 147).
Activating Internet Radio
You can activate the Internet radio via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Additional Features ¢ Internet Radio
The device automatically tries to connect to the last Internet radio station that was set.
If a connection is established, you can listen to the station's current programme.
Any information supplied by the station,
such as the name of the station and the
artist and title of the song currently
being played, are shown in the display.
An error message is displayed if a connection could not be established. You
can then select a different station.
The broadcast is ended if a call comes in
or if you make a call.
Internet Radio
Radio 56.4
Artist
Title
Back
Stations
Selecting a station
§§Stations§§
Stations
Radio 56.4
Oldies
Pop and Rock
Classics
Radio 1598
Radio Art and Culture
.1234 Radio
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
q
§§OK§§
Press the display key.
All of the configured Internet radio stations are displayed.
Select the required station.
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
V
OK
67
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Using Internet services
Displaying Internet services in the Information Centre
You can display information from Internet services (info services).
Prerequisite: The Info Services function has been activated in the Web configurator and
info services have been set up (£ Page 145).
Info services are news (RSS feeds) and weather reports. RSS feeds are information that is
provided in a standardised format for simple and structured publication on websites (e.g.,
news sites, blogs, audio/video logs etc.) and that you normally have to subscribe to.
You can access the info services via the Information Centre. Open the Information Centre
using the D key.
¤ Select between displaying News,
Info Services
News
Weather
Internet Radio
Back
q
Weather reports and Internet Radio.
Select the required display.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to confirm
the selection.
OK
News
News is divided into a range of topics: Headlines, Entertainment, Computer, Sports,
Business, Sci/Tech. Sub-topics are defined for each topic in the Web configurator and
assigned to the RSS feed library of a provider (max. ten RSS feeds per topic). You normally
have to subscribe to RSS feeds with a provider.
q
News
Headlines
Entertainment
Computer
Sports
Business
Sci/Tech
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
Select the required topic.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to confirm the
selection.
OK
The sub-topics defined are displayed, depending on your selection.
q Select the required sub-topic.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to confirm the selection.
The screen of the selected info service is displayed.
68
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / messages.fm / 11/4/10
Using Internet services
Example: Headlines
If the full line cannot be displayed, the text scrolls through from right to left.
The display is updated every 10 seconds.
q
Select the required headlines.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
The headline for the news item is displayed.
q
Scroll through the news item.
r
Scroll to the next or previous news item.
Weather reports
W
V
You can display Weather Reports for a
maximum of ten locations. You specify
the city, state and country in the Web
configurator.
If multiple cities are defined, the display
switches every 10 seconds.
r Scroll to the next or previous
weather report.
Back
Closing info services
The info services display automatically closes if an event occurs, e.g., an incoming call.
If an info service has been activated as a screensaver, you can close the display by pressing
the I key.
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can also display an info service permanently as a screensaver (£ Page 78).
69
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Configuring basic settings
Your telephone is preconfigured, but you can change the settings to suit your individual
requirements.
Setting the date and time
The date and time must be set accurately to record the correct time for incoming calls and
use the alarm clock and calendar.
Please note
The address of a time server on the Internet or the local network is saved on your
phone. The date and time are taken from this time server provided that the phone is
connected to the network and synchronisation with the time server is activated.
Manual settings are overwritten in this case.
The settings for the time server should be made via the Web configurator
(£ Page 153).
You use the display menu to manually set the date and time:
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Date / Time
How the date and time are displayed depends on which time and date format is set
(£ Page 156).
Date:
~
Enter the day, month and year in eight-digit format, e.g., for 14 January 2010:
For the date format dd.mm.yyyy14012010
For the date format mm.dd.yyyy01142010
~
Time:
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Save§§
Enter the time in four-digit format, e.g., 0715 for 07:15.
Time display for this setting in 24-hour format: 07:15
Time display for this setting in 12-hour format: 07:15 AM
Press the display key to save your settings.
70
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Setting the ringer
You can set the volume and melody of the ringer. You can select two different volume levels for time-based operations and completely silence the ringer for anonymous calls.
Setting the volume
The volume of the ringer for incoming calls can be adjusted over ten levels.
Setting the volume in idle status
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Audio Settings ¢ Ringer Settings ¢ Volume
r
Volume
Calls
U
T
Back
§§Save§§
Select the required volume.
The volume is adjusted
immediately. You can test
the setting by playing back
the ringer with the melody
set at the selected volume
level.
Press the display key to save
the settings.
Save
Setting the volume while the phone is ringing
You can adjust the volume while the phone is ringing using the H key. Each time you
press the key, the volume will increase or decrease by one level. The last setting is saved.
Setting a melody
You can choose various ringer settings, melodies or sounds from the resource directory
(£ Page 100) and configure different ringer settings for each VoIP account.
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Audio Settings ¢ Ringer Settings ¢ Melodies
Melodies
W
Sound1
Account12:
Sound1
Mobile:
Sound2
All Calls:
T
Individual
Version 2, 27.05.2010
List
U
Save
Each configured VoIP account is listed
along with its current melody. The
default setting for All Calls is Individual,
i.e., the relevant setting is applied to each
account. If you select a melody for All
Calls, this applies to all accounts.
q Select the VoIP account you want
to set the ringer for or select All
Calls.
§§List§§ Press the display key to display the
melodies.
71
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Melodies
Sound1
Sound2
Sound3
Sound4
Sound5
Spung6
Sound7
Back
§§Save§§
Account12
OK
All of the melodies from the resource
directory are displayed.
At the top right-hand corner of the
screen, you can see which VoIP account
you are editing or All Calls.
q Choose the melody.
The selected melody is played at
the set volume.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to confirm the
selection.
Press the display to save the settings if you have created the settings for all
accounts.
Setting alternative volumes for particular times
You can set a different volume for a particular time period, e.g., during the night.
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Audio Settings ¢ Ringer Settings ¢ Time Control
r
Time Control
Alternative Ringer Volume
U
T
From:
~
00:00
To:
06:00
Back
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Save§§
Save
Select the required volume.
The volume is adjusted
immediately. You can test
the setting by playing back
the ringer with the chosen
melody at the adjusted volume level.
In the From and To fields
enter the time period (start
and finish) for the alternative
ringer volume in four-digit
format, e.g., 2215 for 22:15
and 0600 for 06:00.
Press the display key to save the settings.
72
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Silencing the ringer for anonymous calls
You can silence the ringer for external calls where the caller has withheld their number.
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Audio Settings ¢ Ringer Settings
Ringer Settings
Volume
Melodies
Time Control
Anon. Call Silencing
Back
³
If the function is activated, the Anon. Call
Silencing entry is marked with ³. The
phone will then not ring if an anonymous
call is received. The call is still shown on
the display.
§§Change§§
Activate/deactivate the
function with the display
key.
The change is made immediately.
Change
Activating/deactivating advisory tones
Your phone uses advisory tones to tell you about different activities and statuses. The following advisory tones can be activated/deactivated independently of each other:
u Key Tones Each key press is signalled acoustically.
u Confirmations After completing an entry/setting and when a new entry appears in
the network mailbox or call list, when you make an incorrect entry or when you scroll
to the top of a menu.
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Audio Settings ¢ Advisory Tones
r
Key Tones:
Advisory Tones
Key Tones
T On
U
Confirmations:
On
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
Select On or Off.
Confirmations:
r
Select On or Off.
§Save§
Press the display key to save
the setting.
Save
73
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Setting the display
When setting the display, you can configure the idle display, screensaver and backlight.
Display in idle status
The idle display shows the time zones, an analogue or digital clock, the calendar, a picture
or pictures in the form of a slide show. Default setting: Time Zone.
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Display ¢ Idle Display
r
Idle Display
Activation
U
T Time Zone
Selection:
GMT: Edinburgh, Dublin, London
Back
Select from Time Zone, Clock, Calendar, Slide Show and Pictures.
The options you have chosen will then be
available at the bottom of the display.
s Move the cursor to Selection.
Save
Setting the time zone
10:12
When setting the Time Zone, a map of
the world showing the time zones
appears on the screen. The current setting is highlighted.
You can change the time zone here or via
the Web configurator (£ Page 153).
17.05.2010
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Calls
Select Line
74
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Idle Display
Activation:
Time Zone
Selection:
T
GMT: Edinburgh, Dublin, London U
List
Changing the time zone:
§§List§§ Press the display key to display the
list of all time zones.
q Select the required time zone.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to apply the
chosen time zone.
§§Save§§ Press the display key to save the
settings.
Save
Clock
If you select Clock, a clock showing the
current time is displayed.
By default, the time is set by a time server
(£ Page 153). You can deactivate the
time server and set the time manually
(£ Page 70).
Choose between an analogue and a digital time display.
17.05.2010
Calls
Select Line
r
Selection:
Idle Display
Activation:
§§Save§§
Clock
Selection:
T
Analog Clock
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
U
Choose between Analog
Clock and Digital Clock.
Press the display key to save
the settings.
Save
75
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Calendar
10:12
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
17
18
19
20
21
27.05.2010 22
3
10
17
24
31
4
11
18
25
Calls
5
12
19
26
6
13
20
27
7
14
21
28
1
8
15
22
29
2
9
16
23
30
If you select Calendar, a calendar showing the current month is displayed. You
can find out more about the calendar
function in the Managing the calendar
section on Page 63.
No further settings are required.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save
the settings.
Select Line
Slide show
10:12
If you choose Slide Show you select a
series of pictures to be displayed one
after the other at 10-second intervals.
If you prefer to use your own pictures,
you will need to add them to your
phone's resource directory (£ Page 99).
17.05.2010
Calls
Select Line
Selecting pictures:
The names of the pictures chosen for the
slide show are listed.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to
select different pictures.
A list containing all of the pictures from
the resource directory is displayed.
Idle Display
Activation:
Slide Show
Picture Selection:
<Picture1, Picture2, Picture3, ...>
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Change
Save
76
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Select Pictures
Picture2
³
Picture3
´
Picture4
´
Back
Change
A ³ appears next to the pictures
selected for the slide show.
q
Select the required picture.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to
select a picture for the slide
show or to remove the tick.
§§Back§§
Press the display key when
you have selected all the pictures.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save
the settings.
Pictures
10:12
If you choose Pictures you can select a
picture to be shown on the display.
If you want to use your own picture, you
must save it beforehand in the resource
directory (£ Page 99).
17.05.2010
Calls
Select Line
Idle Display
Activation:
Pictures
Selection:
T
Picture1
Version 2, 27.05.2010
View
U
Save
Selecting a picture:
All of the pictures are loaded from the
resource directory. The first picture is displayed.
r
Scroll through the list.
§§View§§
Press the display key to
enlarge the picture. Return
to normal view by pressing
§§OK§§.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save
the settings.
77
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Activating a screensaver
If a screensaver is activated, this replaces the idle display (£ Page 74). The screensaver
appears if the phone is not used for a period of 15 seconds. Similar to the idle display, the
screensaver can consist of an analogue or digital clock, the calendar, a picture or a series
of pictures in slide show format. However, unlike the idle display, the screensaver covers
the whole of the screen.
If you choose an info service, the screensaver can also contain information (RSS feed,
weather forecasts) (£ Page 78).
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Display ¢ Screensaver
Screensaver
Activation:
T No Screensaver
Back
U
Setting the screensaver:
r Select from No Screensaver, Clock,
Calendar, Slide Show, Pictures
and Info Services.
The options you have chosen will then be
available at the bottom of the display.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save
your settings.
Save
The settings for configuring the screensaver are identical to those used to configure the
idle display:
Clock £ Page 75, Calendar £ Page 76, Slide Show £ Page 76, Pictures £ Page 77.
Displaying the info service as a screensaver
You can have specific information that is available on the Internet displayed as a screensaver (news RSS feeds or weather reports).
Prerequisites:
u You choose Info Services as the Screensaver for your phone.
u The display of info services is activated via the Web configurator; an info service is
selected for the screensaver (£ Page 147).
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Use the D key to call up the Information Centre (£ Page 68) for a list of all the info
services available.
78
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Selecting an info service
r
Screensaver
Activation:
T Info Services
Back
U
Select Info Services as the
screensaver.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save
the settings.
If no info service is available, the Analog
Clock will be displayed as the screensaver instead.
Save
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The display of info services may be blocked via the Web configurator (£ Page 145).
79
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Setting the backlight
The brightness of the backlight for the display can be set to one of seven levels or you can
specify a time period during which the backlight is deactivated completely, e.g., at night.
If the display backlight is deactivated, it can be reactivated by pressing any key or by an
incoming call. In this situation, pressing the key has no further function.
Prerequisite: The date and time have already been set.
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Display ¢ Backlight
r
Backlight
Brightness
T 5
U
Time Control:
On
Display off from:
Back
V
Brightness
Select the required brightness
level from 1 to 7. Your setting is
activated immediately so that you
can check it and correct it if necessary.
Time Control
r Select On or Off.
Save
The following fields only appear when
Time Control = On.
Backlight
W
5
Time Control:
On
Display off from:
00:00
Display off until:
00:00
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
Save
Display off from
~
Enter the time at which the
display backlight should be
deactivated, in four-digit
format.
Display off until
~
Enter the time at which the
display backlight should be
reactivated, in four-digit format.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save
your settings.
80
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / settings.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring basic settings
Setting the language
You can view the display texts in different languages.
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Language
The current language is indicated by a
Language
Deutsch
English
Francais
Italiano
Espanol
Portugues
Nederlands
Back
w.
q
Select the required language.
§§Select§§
Press the display key to activate the selected language.
The language is changed.
Select
Resetting the device to the default settings
If you give your device to a third party or change workstation, you can delete your individual settings and data by resetting the device to the factory settings. All system settings
are reset to the default settings. User-specific data is deleted.
This means that network configurations, VoIP accounts, directories, call lists, data in the
resource directory and all of your individual settings are deleted or reset to the factory
settings.
You need the administrator password before you can use this function (£ Page 154).
Please note
You can save your phone's individual settings to a USB stick and import them into this
or another Gigaset DE900 IP PRO at a later date (£ Page 127).
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Reset
~
§§OK§§
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Yes§§
Enter the administrator password.
Press the display key. The password is verified.
If the password is correct, you must now confirm the operation.
Press the display key. The device is reset to the factory settings.
81
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
Configuring settings for the local network
All of the settings for connecting your phone to the local network must be correct to enable communication with other devices in the network and phone calls via the Internet.
Your phone can be connected to the local network using an Ethernet cable or wirelessly
via WLAN. When you first set up the phone, the device will automatically try to connect
to the local network (£ Page 19).
This will work, if:
– You have connected the device to the network using an Ethernet cable
(£ Page 14)
– The gateway automatically assigns network IP addresses using DHCP
– The network uses IP protocol version 4 (IPv4).
The phone is then automatically assigned an IP address and is connected to the local network. You can then continue configuring your phone via the Web configurator at a PC
(£ Page 105).
If the network connection is not established automatically, you will initially not be able to
access the Web configurator. If this is the case, you will have to establish the network connection manually via the display menu:
u If your device is assigned a static IP address, your network administrator must tell you
the IP address of your device. You then assign this address to your phone (£ Page 83).
u If your network uses IPv6, you have to set your phone to Internet protocol version 6
(IPv6) (£ Page 85). The connection is established if the address is assigned automatically. If a static IP address should be assigned to your phone, your network administrator must inform you of this. You then assign this to your phone.
u If you want to connect your phone to the local network using WLAN (£ Page 88), then
you need the security data for the WLAN (network name, encryption).
Whether you configure the network settings when you initially set up the phone
(£ Page 19) or you start configuration via the display menu – the settings are the same.
Warning
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The connection may be interrupted if you change the configuration for a functioning
network connection. You will then no longer be able to access the local network or
the Web configurator and you will no longer be able to make calls via the Internet.
82
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
LAN settings
You start network configuration via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Connectivity ¢ Local Network
Please note:
To get access to network configuration you need to enter the administrator password.
The default setting is admin.
Selecting the network type
r
Network Type
Local Network
Network Type:
T
IPv4
U
Activated Network:
LAN
IP Address Type:
Static
IP Address:
Back
V
Save
Select the IP protocol that is used
in your network (IPv4 or IPv6).
Activated Network
r Select LAN.
To configure the WLAN (£ Page 88).
You may be asked to configure additional settings depending on your selection.
IPv4 configuration
r
Local Network
IP Address Type:
T
Dynamic
U
IP Address:
192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Standard Gateway:
Back
V
IP Address Type
Select Dynamic if your device
receives the IP address via a DHCP
server. Select Static if your device
receives a fixed IP address.
If the Dynamic setting is selected, all further settings are automatically configured. They are displayed here and cannot
be changed.
Save
83
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
Local Network
IP Address Type:
Static
IP Address:
192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Standard Gateway:
Back
V
If you have selected Static as the address
type, you must now create the following
settings:
– IP Address
– Subnet Mask
– Standard Gateway
– Preferred DNS Server and
– Alternate DNS Server
Save
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises four individual groups of numbers with decimal values from
0 to 255 that are separated by a dot, e.g., 192.168.2.1.
Please note:
– The IP address must be included in the address block used by the router for the
local network. The valid address block is defined by the router's IP address and the
subnet mask (see example).
– The IP address must be unique in the local network, which means that it must not
be used by another device connected to the router.
– The static IP address must not belong to the address block that is reserved for the
router's DHCP server.
Check the settings on the router or ask your network administrator.
Example:
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Router IP address:
Network subnet mask
DHCP server address block
Possible IP addresses for the phone
192.168.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.168.2.101 – 92.168.2.255
192.168.2.2 – 192.168.2.100
Subnet Mask:
The subnet mask specifies how many parts of an IP address the network prefix must
comprise.
For example, 255.255.255.0 means that the first three parts of the IP address must be
the same for all devices in the network, while the last part is specific to each device. In
subnet mask 255.255.0.0, only the first two parts are reserved for the network prefix.
Enter the subnet mask that is used by your network.
Standard Gateway
Enter the IP address for the standard gateway through which the local network is connected to the Internet. This is generally the local (private) IP address for your router
(e.g., 192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this information to be able to access the Internet.
84
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
Preferred DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows
you to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a
server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations
where the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
¤ Once all the settings are complete, press the display key §§Save§§ to save the configuration settings.
IPv6 configuration
V
IP Address Type:
r Select Automatic Scan if your
device receives the IP address via a
DHCP server. Select Static if your
device receives a fixed IP address.
If the Automatic Scan setting is selected,
all further settings are automatically configured. They are displayed here and cannot be changed.
V
If you have selected Static as the address
type, you must now create the following
settings:
– IP Address
– Prefix Length and
– Preferred DNS Server
– Alternate DNS Server
Ask your network administrator for your
network settings.
Local Network
IP Address Type:
Automatic Scan
IP Address:
2001:b021:198:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87
Prefix Length:
64
Preferred DNS Server:
Back
Save
Local Network
IP Address Type:
Static
IP Address:
2001:b021:198:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87
Prefix Length:
64
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Preferred DNS Server:
Back
Save
85
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises 128 bits and is represented by eight blocks of hexadecimal
figures from 0 to FFFFFF that are separated by a colon, e.g.,
2001:b021:189:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87.
The IP address comprises a prefix and an interface identifier. The length of the prefix
(usually 64 bits) is determined by the Prefix Length value.
Prefix Length
The prefix length stipulates how many bits of the IP address are used for the network
prefix. Enter the prefix length that is used in your network.
Preferred DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows
you to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a
server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations
where the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
¤ Once all the settings are complete, press the display key §§Save§§ to save the configuration settings.
VLAN tagging
A local network can be divided into logical subnetworks, so-called VLANs (Virtual Local
Area Network, standard IEEE 802.1Q). Multiple VLANs share a physical network and its
components, e.g., switches. Data packets of a VLAN are not forwarded to another VLAN.
VLANs are often used to separate the data traffic of different services (Internet telephony,
Internet TV, ...) and to define different priorities for the data traffic.
If you are operating your phone in a VLAN, enter the identifier of your VLAN (VLAN tag)
here. You get this from your network operator.
Warning
Version 2, 27.05.2010
If you enter an incorrect value here, you must reset the phone to its default settings
(£ Page 81). After this you must re-establish phone access to the local network.
86
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
r
Local Network
Use VLAN Tagging
W
T Yes
~
Select Yes for Use VLAN Tagging.
Enter the VLAN Identifier (1.4094).
Value range: 1 – 4094
VLAN Identifier (1.4094):
100
Voice VLAN Priority:
1
V
Data VLAN Priority:
Back
Save
Data packets from VLANs can be prioritised. The priority determines whether the data
traffic from a VLAN is given preferential treatment by the network components. You can
define the priority for voice and data separately. In the case of a local network with a lot
of data traffic, you can achieve better-quality phone connections by giving a high priority
to voice data.
¤ On the menus Voice VLAN Priority and Data VLAN Priority, select the priorities you
want for the transfer of voice and data.
Range of values and their Class of Service assignments (according to IEEE 802.1p):
0 No priority (Best Effort)
1 Background services, e.g., News Ticker (Background)
2 Not defined
3 General data services (Excellent Effort)
4 Control services, e.g., routing (Controlled Load)
5 Video
6 Voice data (Voice)
7 Top priority for network control software (Network Control)
¤ Once all the settings are complete, press the display key §§Save§§ to save the configuration settings.
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Further options for optimising the voice quality are available in the Web configurator
under QoS settings (Quality of Service)£ Page 123.
87
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
Configuring WLAN settings
You can connect your phone wirelessly to the local network if you have a WLAN access
point in your network. The Gigaset DE900 IP PRO has an integrated WLAN client in accordance with the IEEE 802.11b/g/n standard and can establish wireless connections with a
maximum data transfer rate of 150 Mbit/s. Encryption in line with WiFi security requirements is supported.
Please note
A poor WLAN connection, e.g., a weak signal, can affect the voice quality of your VoIP
connection.
Prerequisite: The WLAN function is activated (default setting) (£ Page 129).
You start WLAN configuration via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Connectivity ¢ Local Network
Selecting the network type
r
Network Type:
Select the IP protocol that is used
in your network (IPv4 or IPv6).
Activated Network:
r Select WLAN.
Local Network
Network Type:
T
IPv4
U
Activated Network:
WLAN
WLAN:
Company Network
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Network Name (SSID):
Back
V
Save
88
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
Searching for a network
The phone searches for wireless networks within range. You select the network that you
want to connect the device to. Alternatively, you can enter the name of the required
WLAN manually.
Searching for wireless networks
Local Network
WLAN:
<Manual Entry>
Network Name (SSID):
Network Key:
V
IP Address Type:
Edit
Save
Local Network
Manual Entry
˝ Network 1
Network x
˝ Network z
Back
«
«
«
Scan survey:
Your device searches for wireless networks within range.
§§Edit§§
Press the display key to start
the scan survey.
While the scan is running, the display
flashes
WLAN.
If the search is unsuccessful, the Local
Network screen is displayed.
Enter the network manually or repeat the
search at a later date.
If the search was successful, the wireless
networks are displayed with their network name (SSID) and the following
icons:
˝ The WLAN is encrypted.
« Signal strength of this WLAN connection.
Selecting a WLAN:
q Select the required WLAN.
§§OK§§ Press the display key to confirm
the selection.
The selected network is displayed.
The Network Name (SSID) field is automatically completed and cannot be
changed.
Now enter the network key.
OK
Local Network
WLAN:
Company Network
Network Name (SSID):
Company Network
Network Key:
*****|
Version 2, 27.05.2010
IP Address Type:
Back
V
Save
89
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring settings for the local network
Selecting a WLAN manually
Local Network
WLAN:
<Manual Entry>
Network Name (SSID):
Gigaset |
Network Key:
V
IP Address Type:
Û
It is possible to avoid sending the SSID
and therefore hide the WLAN. Such
WLANs cannot be found during a network search. If the WLAN that you want to
connect to prevents the SSID from being
sent, you will have to connect manually.
~ Enter the network name (SSID) for
the required WLAN.
Save
Entering the network key
Wireless networks are encrypted to prevent unauthorised call screening.
Ask your network administrator for the
encryption code.
~ Enter the network key. The entry is
not visible.
Local Network
WLAN:
Company Network
Network Name (SSID):
Company Network
Network Key:
******|
V
IP Address Type:
Û
Save
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The WLAN settings are complete.
You can now save the settings with the display key §§Save§§ if:
u You use IPv4 as the Network Type,
u Your phone automatically acquires an IP address via a DHCP server in the network.
The device creates a connection to the wireless network access point and requests an IP
address. You can access the wireless network as soon as the address is assigned. The Web
configurator can now be accessed via a PC, where you configure further settings, e.g.,
your VoIP accounts (£ Page 105).
In the following instances, the network configuration is not yet complete and further settings must be made:
u Network with IPv4 and static IP address (£ Page 83)
u IPv6 network (£ Page 85)
90
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Connecting a mobile phone or headset
Connecting a mobile phone or headset
You can connect the following to your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO:
u A headset via the RJ-9 connector
u A headset via DECT or Bluetooth™
u A mobile phone via Bluetooth™ (Link2Mobile™)
You can assign a separate VoIP account to the connected mobile phone via the Web
configurator (£ Page 113). Incoming calls for the mobile phone are forwarded to the
base station and can be answered there.
u A handset via DECT
A list of possible handsets is included in the Appendix under Accessories
(£ Page 173).
A maximum of one device can be connected via Bluetooth and one device via DECT.
Connecting a headset via RJ9
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Connect the cable for the headset to the RJ9 connector on the phone.
91
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Connecting a mobile phone or headset
Connecting a mobile phone or headset via Bluetooth
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO can use Bluetooth™ to communicate wirelessly with other
devices also using this technology. You can connect a headset or a mobile phone.
Before you can use your Bluetooth devices, you must first activate Bluetooth and then
register the device to the base station.
You will find a description of how to operate your Bluetooth devices in the user guides for
these devices.
Please note
u You can operate headsets on your phone that have the headset or speaker profile.
If several profiles are available, the speaker profile is used to communicate.
u It can take up to 5 seconds to establish a connection between your phone and a
Bluetooth headset. This applies both when a call is accepted using the headset or
transferred to the headset, and when a number is dialled from the headset.
u Only one device can be connected via Bluetooth.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
You activate the Bluetooth function via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Connectivity ¢ Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Activation
Search for Device
Known Device
Own Device
Back
³
If the function is activated, the
Activation entry is marked with ³.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to activate/deactivate the Bluetooth function.
In the idle display, the ò icon shows that
Bluetooth mode is activated (£ Page 4).
Change
Version 2, 27.05.2010
As soon as Bluetooth is activated, your phone is visible to all Bluetooth devices in the
receiving range. To create a connection to a device, it must be entered as a Known Device
(£ Page 94).
92
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Connecting a mobile phone or headset
Searching for a headset or mobile phone
In Bluetooth mode, the distance between the base station and the activated Bluetooth
device should not exceed 10 m.
Please note
If you would like to use a headset with your phone that is already registered to another
device (e.g., to a mobile phone), please deactivate this connection before you start
the registration process.
Bluetooth
Activation
Search for Device
Known Device
Own Device
Back
³
Searching for a device:
q Select Search for Device.
§OK§ Press the display key.
The search may take up to 30 seconds.
A list of the devices within range, including names, is displayed. A message is displayed if no Bluetooth devices are found.
OK
The devices are displayed with their
name and the following icons:
ô Headset
l Mobile phone
Search for Device
ô Gigaset
l Device1
l Device2
ô Device3
View
Options
Cancelling the search:
§§Cancel§§
Press the display key to cancel the search.
Viewing the entry:
§§View§§
Press the display key. Device
name and address are displayed.
Repeating the search
§§Options§§
q
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§OK§
Press the display key.
Select Repeat Search.
Press the display key to confirm the action. A new search is started.
93
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Connecting a mobile phone or headset
Registering/de-registering a Bluetooth device
q
Search for Device
ô Gigaset
l Mobile1
§§Options§
q
Select the required device.
Press the display key.
Select Trust Device.
§OK§
Trust Device
Repeat Search
Back
OK
Press the display key to confirm the action.
~
Enter the PIN for the Bluetooth device to be registered.
§OK§
Press the display key to register the device.
It will be added under Known Device.
Please note
Only one device can be registered via Bluetooth at a time. The existing device is
deleted if you register another device.
Changing the name of the registered Bluetooth device.
q
Known Device
Device Name:
Gigaset
Device Address:
0a:b3:46:33:a2:78
Edit
Select Known Device.
Press the display key.
The entry for the registered device is displayed.
Changing the name of the device:
§§Edit§§
Press the display key.
~
Enter the name you want
your phone to display for
the device (max. 16 characters).
§Save§§
Press the display key.
§OK§
Delete
De-registering a Bluetooth device
§§Delete§§
Version 2, 27.05.2010
§§Yes§§
Press the display key.
Confirm the action.
94
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Connecting a mobile phone or headset
Changing the name of your own device
q
Own Device
Device Name:
A|
A B C 2
Back
Select Own Device.
Press the display key. The
entry for your phone is displayed.
~
Enter the Bluetooth name
for the phone (max. 16 characters).
§Save§§
Press the display key.
The new name is saved.
§Edit§
Abc
Save
Connecting a mobile phone or headset via DECT
You can connect a headset or a handset via DECT. Only one device can be connected to
the device via DECT at a time.
Before you can use your DECT devices, you must activate the DECT function and register
the device on the Gigaset DE900 IP PRO.
You will find a description of how to operate your DECT devices in the user guides for
these devices.
Activating/deactivating the DECT function
You activate the DECT function via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Connectivity ¢ DECT
DECT
Activation
DECT Registration
DECT De-Registration
Eco Mode+
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
³
³
If the function is activated, the
Activation entry is marked with ³.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to activate/deactivate the DECT
function.
In the idle display, the ¼ icon shows
that the DECT mode is activated
(£ Page 4).
Change
95
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / connectivity.fm / 11/4/10
Connecting a mobile phone or headset
Registering/de-registering the device
To register a device to the Gigaset DE900 IP PRO via DECT, the registration process must
be initialised on the base station and on the DECT device you wish to register.
DECT
Activation
DECT Registration
DECT De-Registration
Eco Mode+
³
³
q
§OK§
~
§OK§
Back
Select DECT Registration.
Press the display key. A device that
starts the registration process
within 60 seconds is registered to
the phone.
Enter the PIN for the DECT device
to be registered.
Press the display key.
OK
Any incoming calls are ignored during the registration process.
Please note
Only one device can be registered via DECT at a time. The existing device is de-registered if you register another device.
De-registering the device
q
Select DECT De-Registration.
Press the display key.
Confirm the action.
§§OK§§
§§Yes§§
Activating/deactivating Eco Mode
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO is equipped with the environmentally friendly Eco Mode+ for
DECT operation. When you activate Eco Mode+, the radiation (DECT transmission power)
of the phone in idle status is switched off.
DECT
Activation
DECT Registration
DECT De-Registration
Eco Mode+
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
³
³
If the function is activated, Eco Mode+
is highlighted with ³.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to activate/deactivate Eco Mode.
If Eco Mode is activated, the DECT icon
¼ appears in green on the idle display
of the phone (£ Page 4).
OK
96
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using the resource directory
Using the resource directory
The resource directory in your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO provides a memory in which you can
manage pictures and sounds. The Resource Directory contains
u Sounds that you can use as ringers
u Pictures that you can use as screensavers
u Pictures that you can use as caller pictures in directory entries (Vcard pictures).
The Resource Directory supports the following file formats:
Type
Format
Size
Sounds
mp3
Max. 2 MB
Pictures
– Pictures
– Vcard pictures (CLIP)
JPG
320 x 240 pixels
64 x 78 pixels
Max. 250 KB
Max. 250 KB
Your phone contains a variety of default sounds and pictures. You can play the available
sounds and view the pictures.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can download other pictures and ringers from the Web configurator into the
Resource Directory (£ Page 157). You can also download them from a USB stick. If a USB
stick is connected to the phone, the data is automatically added to the data in the local
Resource Directory (£ Page 102). Data can be transferred from and to the USB storage
device using the Web configurator (£ Page 127).
97
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using the resource directory
Managing screensavers
Your phone includes a selection of pictures that can be used as screensavers. You can load
your own pictures into the resource directory via the Web configurator or make them
available via a USB stick.
You can view, rename and delete pictures in the Resource Directory.
To use one or more pictures (slide show) as a screensaver, you must activate the screensaver function and select the required picture or set up a slide show (£ Page 78).
Open the list of available pictures via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Additional Features ¢ Resource Directory ¢ Screensavers
The pictures are alphabetically sorted by
name.
Displaying a picture in large scale:
q
Select the picture.
§§§View§§
Press the display key.
Screensavers
Picture1
Picture2
Picture3
View
Options
Renaming a picture:
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the Rename action.
§§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action.
~
Enter the name.
§§Save§§
Press the display key.
Deleting a picture:
§§Options§§
q
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Press the display key.
Select Delete.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action. The selected picture is deleted.
You can only delete pictures you have imported yourself, not default pictures.
If you delete a picture that is used as a screensaver, the screensaver function is deactivated.
98
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using the resource directory
Managing caller pictures
Any pictures that you want to use as caller pictures must be saved in the Resource Directory. You can add your own pictures to the resource directory using the Web configurator
or a USB storage device.
A caller picture forms part of the directory entry (vCard). To transfer vCards, the CLIP feature must be enabled by the caller and recipient.
You can view, rename and delete pictures in the Resource Directory.
You assign a caller picture from the Resource Directory to an entry in your directory
£ Page 49.
You open the list of available caller pictures via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Additional Features ¢ Resource Directory ¢ Caller Pictures
The pictures are alphabetically sorted by
name.
Displaying a picture in large scale:
q
Select the picture.
Caller Pictures
black_susan
§§§View§§
brown_tim
forster_fred
View
Options
Press the display key.
Renaming a picture:
§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the Rename action.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action.
~
Enter the name.
§§Save§§
Press the display key.
If you change the name of a picture that is used in a directory entry, it will also be renamed
in the directory entry.
Deleting a picture:
§§Options§§
q
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Press the display key.
Select Delete.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action. The selected picture is deleted.
If you delete a picture that is used in a directory entry, it will also be removed from the
directory entry.
99
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using the resource directory
Managing sounds
The Resource Directory includes a range of sounds that you can use as ringers. You can
load your own ringers via the Web configurator (£ Page 157) or add them using a USB
storage device.
You can play, rename and delete sounds in the Resource Directory.
Sounds can be assigned as ringers via the display menu (£ Page 71).
You open the list of available sounds via the display menu:
‰ ¢ Additional Features ¢ Resource Directory ¢ Sounds
Sounds
Sound1
Sound2
Sound3
Sound4
Sound5
Sound6
Sound7
Back
The sounds are alphabetically sorted by
name.
Playing sounds:
q
Select a sound.
The sound is played after a few moments.
Renaming a sound:
Options§§
Options
q
§§OK§§
~
§§Save§§
Press the display key.
Select the Rename action.
Press the display key to confirm the action.
Enter the name.
Press the display key.
Deleting a sound:
§§Options§§
q
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Press the display key.
Select Delete.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action. The selected sound is deleted.
You can only delete sounds you have imported yourself, not default sounds.
If you delete a sound that is being used as a ringer, default sound Sound1 is assigned to
all the affected accounts.
100
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using the resource directory
Checking the capacity of the Resource Directory
You can display the available capacity in the Resource Directory.
‰ ¢ Additional Features ¢ Resource Directory ¢ Capacity
Capacity
The available capacity is displayed as a
percentage.
Connect a USB storage device to expand
it (£ Page 103).
Available:: 50 %
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Back
101
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using a USB connection
Using a USB connection
You can connect a USB stick with a maximum storage capacity of 16 GB to the telephone.
u As a memory extension for the resource directory: additional capacity for personal
data, e.g., ringers, pictures, call records, directory entries (vCards) and for data backup.
u For Gigaset MobileOffice™: To personalise your phone with personal settings and data
including VoIP accounts, network settings, ringer settings and display settings etc. that
are saved on the stick.
Select the mode in which the USB storage device is to be used via the Web configurator
(£ Page 127).
As soon as you plug a USB stick into the device, the data stored on it is automatically available on the phone. The display shows the Ý icon.
Connecting a USB device
The USB port can be found on the left-hand side of the device.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Connect the USB stick to the USB port on the device.
102
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using a USB connection
To remove the USB storage device:
¤ To prevent loss of data, you should de-register the USB stick from the device before
removing it from the device.
Via the display menu:
Or
Web configurator:
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Connectivity ¢ USB
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ USB Mode and
Data Transfer ¢ Deregister USB stick (£ Page 127)
By default, the USB mode is set to Memory Expansion. As soon as you have connected
the USB storage device, any data that is stored on the USB device is available on the telephone.
Using a USB storage device to expand the memory
Prerequisite: USB mode is set to Memory Expansion (£ Page 127)
The phone will access data that is stored in the DE900_IP_PRO directory on the USB stick.
If this directory does not exist when the USB stick is connected, it is created automatically.
Personal data (ringers and pictures) on the USB stick are added to the local resource directory on the phone. These can then be accessed via the display menu if you want to assign
a picture to a directory entry or set a ringer for your phone, for example. USB data is indicated by the Ý icon.
Data must be stored on the USB storage device in the following formats before it can be
used:
Type
Format
Sounds
mp3
Pictures
– Picture
– Vcard picture (CLIP)
JPG
320 x 240 pixels
64 x 78 pixels
Version 2, 27.05.2010
When you connect the USB storage device to the phone, the system is automatically
restarted and the saved data is available. If you remove the USB storage device from the
phone, the phone restarts and only the data that is saved on the phone is available.
The data can be used in the same way as the local data as long as the USB storage device
is connected. If the USB storage device is removed and assigned data is no longer available, the settings are either reset to the default settings (e.g., the ringer) or the assignment
is deleted (e.g., a caller picture assigned to a directory entry).
The local directory and the directory on the USB storage device remain separate. The local
directory remains the default directory.
You can also use the USB stick to save your phone settings and directories and restore
them if necessary. This is done using the Web configurator (£ Page 128).
103
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / resources.fm / 11/4/10
Using a USB connection
Using a USB stick for Gigaset MobileOFFICE™
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO supports Gigaset MobileOFFICE™.
Prerequisite: USB mode is set to Mobile Office (£ Page 127)
This enables you to use the current configuration and personal phone settings that are
saved on your USB stick on a different phone or workstation.
In Mobile Office mode the phone works exclusively with the data on the USB stick and
ignores the data stored locally on the phone. The phone settings are retained and can be
used again when you deactivate Mobile Office mode.
You save your personal settings using the Web configurator (£ Page 127).
If Mobile Office is activated and you plug a USB stick into the USB port of the device, you
will be asked whether you want to start MobileOffice. If you confirm this, the phone will
restart and the configuration provided on the USB stick will be loaded into the memory
of the phone.
104
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
The Web configurator provides you with a user interface that you can use to configure
your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO on the PC. The setup assistant makes it easier for you to set
your device up for the first time.
Prerequisite: Your phone is connected to the local network.
In most cases, this connection is established automatically as soon as you connect the
device with a network cable (£ Page 14). If this is not the case, you establish the connection to the local network via the display menu when you set the device up for the first time
(£ Page 19).
Starting the Web configurator
You will need the IP address for your phone. You will find this via the display menu, in
the LAN settings for the device:
‰ ¢ Settings ¢ Connectivity ¢ Local Network (£ Page 83).
Please note
The IP address can sometimes change, depending on the settings of the DHCP server
in your network.
Accessing the Web configurator:
¤ Launch the Internet browser on your PC.
¤ Enter the IP address in the browser's address field:
Example:
The login screen appears.
¤ Select the appropriate language.
¤ Enter the user name and the corresponding password:
User
If you want to operate your phone on the PC.
Default password: user
Note: This option will be provided in a future release.
Administrator
If you want to configure your phone.
Default password: admin
¤ Click on OK.
If you have selected admin, the Web configurator will now start.
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
For your security, you should change the default passwords (£ Page 154).
105
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Launching the Web configurator
If you have not set up a VoIP account yet, the setup assistant screen will appear
(£ Page 108).
If you have already set up a VoIP connection, select the function that you wish to use.
u Use the Settings tab to set or change individual functions on your phone
(£ Page 117).
u Open the Status tab to obtain information about the status of your phone
(£ Page 161).
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can use the Help button in the top right corner to request help for every screen
of the Web configurator.
106
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Understanding the Web configurator menu tree
The following illustration shows the Web configurator menu tree.
Configuration Assistant
Settings
£ Page 108
Network and Connections
LAN Settings
Server and Phone Systems
QoS Settings
VoIP Settings
Security Settings
USB Mode and Data Transfer
WLAN
Bluetooth
DECT
Telephony
Connections
Audio
Call Divert
Dialling Plans
Do Not Disturb
Call Live Recording
Voicemail Services
Messaging
E-mail
MWI Light
Services
IP Info Services
Online Directory
LDAP
Function Keys
System
£ Page 151
Date and Time
Security
Display
Upload Tones and Pictures
Reboot and Reset
Save and Restore
Firmware Update
Status
Device
System Log
Version 2, 27.05.2010
SIP Protocol
PCAP Logging
Storage Allocation
£ Page 161
£ Page 161
£ Page 162
£ Page 162
£ Page 162
£ Page 118
£ Page 122
£ Page 123
£ Page 124
£ Page 125
£ Page 129
£ Page 129
£ Page 131
£ Page 132
£ Page 134
£ Page 137
£ Page 139
£ Page 139
£ Page 141
£ Page 141
£ Page 142
£ Page 142
£ Page 144
£ Page 145
£ Page 148
£ Page 150
£ Page 153
£ Page 154
£ Page 154
£ Page 157
£ Page 158
£ Page 158
£ Page 159
107
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Running the setup assistant
This assistant helps you to configure your phone. It will guide you through all the important steps involved in:
– Configuring your phone connections
– Connecting devices using DECT or Bluetooth
– Configuring your e-mail account
Afterwards, you will be able to change all the settings that you create using the setup
assistant in the Settings tab (£ Page 111).
When you have completed the fields on a screen, click on Next >. If you want to go back
a screen to change something, click on < Back. Use Cancel to close the setup assistant.
¤ Make sure that you have the registration data for your VoIP provider to hand before
you begin the configuration.
¤ Click on Next > to begin the configuration.
Configuring a VoIP account
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You have the following options for configuring a VoIP account:
Auto Configuration
Configuration is completed without you needing to enter
any information. Your VoIP provider must permit this for
your account.
Profile Download
Your provider's default settings are used. You only have to
enter your personal registration data.
Manual configuration
You create all the settings yourself.
108
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Automatic configuration
¤ Select Yes if your provider permits automatic configuration for your account and Click
on Next >.
The automatic configuration is now carried out. This may take a few minutes. Once the
process is complete, the £ Completing configuration screen will appear.
Configuration via provider profile
If your provider does not enable automatic configuration, your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO
offers a range of provider profiles that make it easy for you to configure your VoIP
accounts. Each profile contains the most important configuration settings for the provider concerned.
¤ Click on No if automatic configuration is not permitted and then click on Next >.
The Profile Download screen will appear.
¤ Click on Next > to start the configuration.
¤ Select your Country and click on Next >.
¤ Select your Provider and click on Next >.
The most important configuration settings will now be loaded.
¤ Click on Next >.
The next step is for you to enter £ Personal provider data.
Configuration without provider profile
If your provider is not on the list, select Other Provider.
¤ Select the required settings for your VoIP account on the following screens. Your provider will supply you with this data.
General provider data
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Domain
Specify the last part of your SIP address (URI).
Example: For the SIP address 987654321@provider.com you would enter
provider.com.
Proxy Server Address
The SIP proxy is your VoIP provider's gateway server. Enter the IP address or the DNS
name of your SIP proxy server.
Example: myprovider.com.
109
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Proxy Server Port
Enter the number of the communication port that the SIP proxy uses to send and
receive signalling data (SIP port). Port 5060 is used by most VoIP providers.
Registration Server
Enter the IP address or the DNS name of your registrar server. The registrar is needed
when the phone is registered. It assigns your SIP address (username@domain) to the
public IP address/port number your phone uses to log in. With most VoIP providers,
the registrar server is identical to the SIP server.
Example: reg.myprovider.de.
Registration Server Port
Enter the communication port used on the registrar. Port 5060 is used in most cases.
Registration Refresh Time [sec]
Enter the time intervals at which the phone should repeat the registration with the
VoIP server (SIP proxy) (a request will be sent to establish a session). The repeat is
required so that the phone's entry in the tables of the SIP proxy is retained and the
phone can therefore be reached. The repeat will be carried out for all activated VoIP
phone numbers. The default is 120 seconds.
If you enter 0 seconds, the registration will not be repeated periodically.
¤ Click on Next >.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Network provider data
The phone needs to know its public address in order to receive caller voice data.
The SIP protocol recognises the following options:
u The phone requests the public address from a STUN server on the Internet (Simple
Transversal of UDP over NAT). STUN can only be used with asymmetric NATs and nonblocking firewalls.
u The phone does not direct the connection request to the SIP proxy but to an outbound
proxy on the Internet that supplies the data packets with the public address.
The STUN server and outbound proxy are used alternately to work around the NAT/firewall in the router/gateway.
¤ Enter the required data for the STUN server or outbound proxy:
STUN enabled
Click on Yes if you want your phone to use STUN as soon as it is used on a router with
asymmetric NAT.
STUN Server Address
Enter the DNS name or the IP address of the STUN server on the Internet. If you have
selected Yes in the STUN enabled field, then you must complete this field.
STUN Server Port
Enter the number of the communication port on the STUN server.
The default port is 3478.
STUN Refresh Time [sec]
Enter the time intervals (seconds) at which the phone should repeat the registration
with the STUN server. The repeat is required so that the phone's entry in the tables of
the STUN server is retained. The repeat will be carried out for all activated VoIP phone
numbers. Ask your VoIP provider for the STUN refresh time if necessary. The default
setting is 30 seconds.
110
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
NAT Refresh Time [sec]
Specify the intervals at which you want the phone to update its entry in the NAT routing table. Specify an interval in seconds that is a little shorter than the NAT session
timeout. As a rule you should not change the default value for the NAT update. The
default setting is 20 seconds.
Outbound Proxy Mode
Specify when the outbound proxy should be used.
Always
All signalling and voice data sent by the phone is sent to the outbound proxy.
Automatically
Data sent by the phone is only sent to the outbound proxy when
the phone is connected to a router with symmetric NAT or a blocking firewall. If the phone is behind an asymmetric NAT, the STUN
server is used. If you have set STUN enabled to No, or if you have not
entered a STUN server, the outbound proxy will be used in all cases.
Never
The outbound proxy is not used.
If you leave the Outbound Server Address field empty, the phone does not respond
to the selected mode and operates as if Never were selected.
Outbound Server Address
Enter the DNS name or the IP address of your provider's outbound proxy. With many
providers, the outbound proxy is identical to the SIP proxy.
Outbound Proxy Port
Enter the number of the communication port used by the outbound proxy. The default
port is 5060.
Automatic Negotiation of DTMF Transmission
DTMF signalling is required, for example, for querying and controlling certain network
mailboxes via digit codes or for remote operation of the local voice mail. Select
whether the setting should be made automatically. If you select No, you must determine the setting for the DTMF transfer yourself.
Send Settings for DTMF Transmission
To send DTMF signals via VoIP, you must define how the key codes are to be converted
to DTMF signals and sent:
Audio
As audible information in the voice channel, i.e., it is not known which
key has been pressed.
RFC 2833
As a value (= key pressed) in an RTP packet.
SIP Info
As an "SIP Info" message.
The value (= key pressed) is sent as an SIP data packet.
Ask your VoIP provider which type of DTMF transmission it supports.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Next >.
111
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Personal provider data
In both cases of manual configuration, with and without a provider profile, you now enter
the personal registration data that you have received from your VoIP provider.
¤ Enter the following data:
– Authentication Name
– Authentication Password
– Username
– Display Name
You can also enter a name of your choice for this phone connection. This is advisable if
you use multiple VoIP accounts.
¤ Enter a Connection Name.
¤ Click on Next > to finish configuring the VoIP account.
Completing configuration
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The data for the configured VoIP account is displayed.
¤ To change the settings, click on < Back.
¤ If you want to configure another VoIP account, check the relevant box. In this case, the
Web configurator will return to the start screen when you press Next >
( ¢ Configuring a VoIP account).
¤ Click on Finish to end the setup assistant.
¤ Click on Next > to
– Configure another VoIP account
– Connect a device to your phone via DECT or Bluetooth
– Configure an e-mail account
112
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Connecting DECT and Bluetooth devices
You can connect the following devices to your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO:
u A headset via DECT or Bluetooth™
u A mobile phone via Bluetooth™ (Link2Mobile™)
If you assign a separate account to the mobile phone that is connected (£ Page 136),
incoming calls are forwarded to the base station and can be answered there.
u A mobile phone via DECT
Only one device can be connected at a time via Bluetooth or DECT.
Registering a mobile phone or headset via DECT
You can connect a headset or a mobile phone via DECT. Only one device can be connected via DECT at a time.
Before you can use your DECT devices, you must first activate the DECT function and register the device on the base station.
First you must switch to registration mode.
¤ Enter the Registration PIN for the DECT device to be registered. You can find the
default PIN in the user guide for the device.
¤ Click on Start registration.
Now you must start the registration on the DECT device as well. Information about this
can be found in the user guide for your DECT device.
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can also register DECT devices via the display menu (£ Page 96).
113
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Registering a Bluetooth device
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO can use Bluetooth™ to communicate wirelessly with other
Bluetooth devices. You can connect a headset or a mobile phone.
Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must register the device on the base station.
¤ Click on Start.
All Bluetooth devices within range of your phone are displayed by Device Name and
Device Type.
Device Type: l Mobile phone
ô Headset
¤ Select Register for the device that you want to register.
¤ Enter the name you want the device to have on your phone in the Device Name field.
¤ If authentication is required for the device, enter the Enter Authentication PIN.
¤ Click on Trust Device to register the device on your phone.
When the Bluetooth device is registered successfully:
¤ Click on Finish to end the setup assistant.
¤ Click on Next > to configure an e-mail account.
Please note
£
u You can also carry out registration via the display menu ( Page 94).
u Headsets can have headset or speaker profiles. If several profiles are available, the
speaker profile is used to communicate.
u It can take up to 5 seconds to establish a connection between your phone and a
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Bluetooth headset. This applies both when a call is accepted using the headset or
transferred to the headset, and when a number is dialled from the headset.
114
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Configuring an e-mail account
Your phone can notify you when new e-mail messages have been received on your
incoming e-mail server. You can connect to the incoming e-mail server and display the
sender, date/time of receipt, subject and body of the message for every e-mail message
in the incoming e-mail list.
Prerequisites:
– You have set up an e-mail account with an ISP.
– The incoming e-mail server uses the POP3 protocol.
¤ Select Yes if you want to configure an e-mail account and click on Next >.
¤ Enter the data for your e-mail account:
¤
¤
¤
¤
– Authentication Name
– Authentication Password
– POP3 Serverr
You will have received this data from your provider when you set up your e-mail
account.
Select how often you want new e-mails to be retrieved. You can choose from values
between Every 15 minutes and Once per day.
Select whether new e-mails should be displayed via the Message Centre key E on
your phone (£ Page 62).
Select whether e-mails should be transmitted via a Security Connection (SSL). Indicate the Server Port for the secure connection.
In this case you can only access the message via the display menu, not via the Message
Centre key (£ Page 59).
Click on Next >.
Please note
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can configure additional settings for e-mail messages on the Settings tab
(£ Page 142).
115
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Closing the assistant
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You have now successfully configured your phone using the Web configurator. The following data is displayed once again:
– The number of VoIP accounts configured
– The name of the default account for outgoing calls
– E-mail notification configured: Yes or No
¤ Click on Finish to close the assistant and apply the settings.
¤ Click on < Back if you want to make changes to your settings.
116
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
The Settings menu of the Web configurator allows you to change settings that you have
already made using the phone's display menu or the assistant, or that were the default
settings when the phone was delivered. You also have further configuration options.
The menu offers the following functions:
u Network and Connections (£ Page 117)
Configure the settings for the local network, server and phone system, set up other
VoIP accounts and create the security settings.
You will also find setting options for USB and data transfer, connecting your phone
wirelessly (WLAN) and connecting Bluetooth or DECT devices.
u Telephony (£ Page 133)
Edit your configured VoIP accounts, optimise the quality of the voice connections, configure phone functions such as call divert and dialling plans and set up blacklists and
voice mail services.
u Messaging (£ Page 142)
Create settings for receiving e-mail and configure the Message Centre (MWI) for your
device.
u Services (£ Page 145)
Select info services and Internet radio stations for your info centre and create settings
for using directories.
u Function Keys (£ Page 151)
Assign frequently used functions to the programmable keys on your phone.
u System (£ Page 153)
Change the basic settings on your phone, e.g., date/time or display settings. You can
also restart the system or add new firmware.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Network and connectors
All of the settings for connecting your phone to the local network must be correct to enable communication with other devices in the network and phone calls via the Internet.
If you use the Web configurator, your phone is already connected to the local network.
You can use the Network and Connections menu to change and extend these settings.
You can also configure additional VoIP accounts and create settings for phone connections:
u LAN settings (£ Page 112)
u Server and phone systems(£ Page 122)
u VoIP settings (£ Page 114)
u Security settings (£ Page 115)
u USB mode and data transfer (£ Page 115)
u WLAN (£ Page 116)
u Bluetooth (£ Page 116)
u DECT (£ Page 117)
117
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
LAN settings
Warning
If an error occurs when you are changing the LAN settings, the PC connection to the
phone may be cancelled and you will no longer have access to the Web configurator.
If this happens, you must re-establish phone access to the local network via the display menu (£ Page 84).
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ LAN Settings
Assigning the network address
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Network Type
¤ Select the IP protocol that is used in your network (IPv4 or IPv6).
You may be asked to configure additional settings depending on your selection.
IPv4 configuration
¤ Select Dynamic if your device receives the IP address via a DHCP server.
¤ Select Static if your device receives a fixed IP address.
If the Dynamic setting is selected, all further settings are configured automatically. They
are displayed and cannot be changed.
If you selected Static as the address type, you must create the following settings:
118
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises four individual groups of numbers with decimal values from
0 to 255 that are separated by a dot, e.g., 192.168.2.1.
Please note:
– The IP address must be included in the address block used by the router/gateway
for the local network. The valid address block is defined by the IP address for the
router/gateway and the subnet mask (see example).
– The IP address must be unique across the network, which means that it must not be
used by another device connected to the router/gateway.
– The fixed IP address must not belong to the address block that is reserved for the
DHCP server for the router/gateway.
Check the settings on the router or ask your network administrator.
Example:
Router IP address:
Network subnet mask
DHCP server address block
Possible IP addresses for the phone
192.168.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.168.2.101 – 192.168.2.255
192.168.2.2 – 192.168.2.100
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask specifies how many parts of an IP address the network prefix must
comprise.
For example, 255.255.255.0 means that the first three parts of an IP address must be
the same for all devices in the network, while the last part is specific to each device. In
subnet mask 255.255.0.0, only the first two parts are reserved for the network prefix.
Enter the subnet mask that is used by your network.
Standard Gateway
Enter the IP address for the standard gateway through which the local network is connected to the Internet. This is generally the local (private) IP address for your router/
gateway (e.g., 192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this information to be able to access
the Internet.
Preferred DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows
you to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a
server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations
where the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
119
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
IPv6 configuration
IP Address Type
¤ Select Auto Configuration if your device receives the IP address via a DHCP server.
¤ Select Static if your device receives a fixed IP address.
If Auto Configuration is selected, all further settings are made automatically. They are displayed here and cannot be changed.
If you selected Static as the address type, you must create the following settings:
Version 2, 27.05.2010
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises 128 bits and is represented by eight blocks of hexadecimal
figures from 0 to FFFFFF that are separated by a colon, e.g.,
2001:b021:189:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87.
The IP address comprises a prefix and an interface identifier. The length of the prefix
(usually 64 bits) is determined by the Prefix Length value.
Prefix Length
The prefix length stipulates how many bits of the IP address are used for the network
prefix. Enter the prefix length that is used in your network.
Preferred DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows
you to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a
server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations
where the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
120
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
VLAN tagging
A local network can be divided into logical subnetworks, so-called VLANs (Virtual Local
Area Network, standard IEEE 802.1Q). Multiple VLANs share a physical network and its
components, e.g., switches. Data packets of a VLAN are not forwarded to another VLAN.
VLANs are often used to separate the data traffic of different services (Internet telephony,
Internet TV, ...) and to define different priorities for the data traffic.
If you are operating your phone in a VLAN, enter the identifier of your VLAN (VLAN tag)
here. You get this from your network operator.
¤ Select Yes to use VLAN tagging.
¤ Enter your VLAN tag in the VLAN Identifier (1..4094) field.
Value range: 1 – 4094
Warning
Version 2, 27.05.2010
If you enter an incorrect value here, you must reset the phone to its default settings
(£ Page 81). After this you must re-establish phone access to the local network
(£ Page 83).
Data packets from VLANs can be prioritised. The priority determines whether the data
traffic from a VLAN is given preferential treatment by the network components. You can
define the priority for voice and data separately. In the case of a local network with a lot
of data traffic, you can achieve better-quality phone connections by giving a high priority
to voice data.
¤ On the menus Voice VLAN Priority and Data VLAN Priority, select the priorities you
want for the transfer of voice and data.
Range of values and their Class of Service assignments (according to IEEE 802.1p):
0 No priority (Best Effort)
1 Background services, e.g., News Ticker (Background)
2 Not defined
3 General data services (Excellent Effort)
4 Control services, e.g., routing (Controlled Load)
5 Video
6 Voice data (Voice)
7 Top priority for network control software (Network Control)
121
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Please note
Further options for optimising the voice quality are available under QoS settings
(Quality of Service)£ Page 123.
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the LAN Settings screen.
Server and phone systems
If you operate a separate HTTP server or a phone system in your local network, use this
screen to configure access to your phone.
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ Server and Phone Systems
Configure HTTP proxy
¤ Select whether you want to release a separate proxy server in the network for your
¤
¤
phone.
If Yes, enter the IP address for the proxy server in the Proxy Server Address field.
The Proxy Server Port is preset to 5060. Change this if your server uses a different port.
Own HTTP server settings
¤ If you operate your own HTTP server, enter the communication data.
HTTP Port
Enter the number for the port to be used for communication by the HTTP server. The
default setting is 80
HTTPS Port
Enter the number for the port to be used for secure connections by the HTTP server.
The default setting is 443
HTTP Connection Type
Select which connections can be established:
HTTP
Unsecured connection
HTTPS
Secure connection
HTTP + HTTPS Both secure and unsecured connections
Automatic logout [min]
Enter the time (minutes) after which an HTTP connection should automatically end if
no entries are made.
Phone systems
If your phone is connected to a phone system, select what type of phone system it is.
Connected with phone system (sample selection)
Standard
The phone is connected to any phone system.
Gigaset T500
The phone is connected to a Gigaset T500PRO.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
...
122
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Call Manager
Select whether you want to accept calls that are transferred via the Call Manager of the
phone system, directly. You have the following options:
– via Headset
– via Handsfree or
– not at all (No)
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the Server and Phone Systems screen.
QoS settings (Quality of Service)
On this screen you can optimise the voice quality of your IP telephone.
The voice quality depends on the priority of the voice data in the IP network. Prioritising
the VoIP data packets is done using the QoS protocol DiffServ (Differentiated Services).
DiffServ defines a number of classes for the quality of service and, within these classes,
various priority levels for which specific prioritisation procedures are defined.
You can specify different QoS values for SIP and RTP packets. SIP packets (Session Initiation Protocol) contain the signalling data, while RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) is used
for the voice transfer.
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ QoS Settings
¤ Enter your chosen QoS values in the SIP ToS/Diffserv (0..63) and RTP ToS/Diffserv
(0..63) fields. Value range: 0 - 63.
Common values for VoIP (default setting):
SIP
40
Highest service class for fast switching of the data flow
(Expedited Flow)
RTP
46
Highest service class for fast forwarding of data packets (Expedited
Forwarding)
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Warning
Do not change these values without consulting your network operator first. A higher
value does not necessarily mean a higher priority. The value determines the service
class, not the priority. The prioritisation procedure used in each case meets the
requirements of this class and is not necessarily suitable for transferring voice data.
Detailed information on the Diffserv protocol can be found in RFC 2474 and RFC 3168.
123
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the QoS Settings screen.
VoIP settings
On this screen you configure the ports for establishing VoIP connections.
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ VoIP Settings
"Listen ports" for VoIP connections
¤ Select the ports on which your phone expects incoming VoIP connections.
Use random ports
¤ Select Yes if the phone should use any available ports for the SIP port and RTP port
instead of fixed ports.
The use of random ports is advisable if you want multiple phones to be operated on
the same router/gateway with NAT. The phones must then use different ports so that
the NAT for the router/gateway is only able to forward incoming calls and voice data
to one (the intended) phone.
¤ If you click on No, the phone uses the ports specified in SIP port and RTP port.
SIP port
Specify the local communication port that the phone should use to send and receive
signalling data. Specify a number between 1024 and 49152. The default port number
for SIP signalling is 5060.
RTP port
Specify the local communication port that the phone should use to receive voice data.
Enter an even number between 1024 and 49152. The port number must not be the
same as the port number in the SIP port field. If you enter an odd number, the next lowest even number will be selected automatically (e.g., if you enter 5003, then 5002 is set
automatically). The default port number for voice transmission is 5004.
ICE enabled
Choose whether or not to use ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment). ICE is similar to STUN (£ Page 110), a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) method for overcoming
NAT firewalls.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the VoIP Settings screen.
124
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Security settings
This screen is where you create security settings for your phone.
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ Security Settings
Remote management
¤ Select whether you want to Allow access from other networks to the WEB configura-
tor (Yes) or not (No).
If you permit Remote Management, this increases the risk of unauthorised access to your
device settings.
¤ Select the network protocol to be used for the communication:
– TLS (Transport Level Security)
– UDP (User Datagram Protocol
– UDP (Transmission Control Protocol)
Security settings
On this screen you can download server certificates onto your phone, delete downloaded
certificates and specify how invalid certificates should be handled.
Server certificates allow a server to be digitally identified via SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
Operating a server with SSL requires a server certificate both for one-way authentication
(server to the client) and for two-way authentication (between client and server). A server
certificate has to be downloaded onto your device so that the device can carry out
authentication.
The Server Certificates and CA Certificates lists contain all downloaded certificates.
¤ Select a certificate from one of the lists.
¤ Click on Remove to delete the certificate from the list.
¤ Click on Details to display information about the certificate.
Import a local certificate
In order for a certificate to be downloaded to your phone, it must be available in your network.
¤ Click on Browse to search for the file on your PC or in your network. Select the required
file.
¤ Click on Upload to download the file onto the device.
Please note
The connection to the handset may be interrupted when transferring or removing a
certificate.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Invalid Certificates
The list contains all invalid certificates.
¤ Select a certificate from the list.
¤ Click on Accept to accept the certificate anyway.
¤ Click on Reject to reject the certificate.
125
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Secure Real Time Protocol (SRTP)
The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP) allows voice data transferred with the
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) to be encrypted.
¤ Activate or deactivate the Secure Real Time Protocol (SRTP).
¤ Select whether you want to Accept Non-SRTP Call or not. If this function is activated,
you also accept incoming calls from a number that does not use SRTP.
¤ Select SRTP Security Type
Encryption and Authentica- The data is encrypted and the device must authenticate
tion
itself to the SIP gateway.
Authentication
The device must authenticate itself to the SIP gateway
but the data is not encrypted.
Encryption
The data is encrypted but the device does not have to
authenticate itself to the SIP gateway.
¤ In the Pre-Shared Key for SRTP field, enter the password for the encryption/authentication via SRTP.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the Security Settings screen.
126
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
USB mode and data transfer
You can connect a USB storage device, e.g., a USB stick, to the phone. The USB memory
can be used in two ways.
u For Gigaset MobileOFFICE™
u As a memory extension
For further information on this, please also refer to the section Using a USB connection
on Page 102.
On this screen you set the USB mode and transfer data from the USB stick to the phone
and vice versa.
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ USB Mode and Data Transfer
De-registering the USB stick from the phone
To prevent loss of data, you should de-register the USB stick from the device before
removing it from the device.
¤ Click on OK next to Deregister USB stick.
You can now remove the USB stick.
Using a USB stick for Gigaset Mobile Office
Activate Mobile Office Mode
You must activate the function before you can use Gigaset Mobile Office. The function is
not activated by default.
¤ Select Yes to activate the Mobile Office mode.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
If a USB stick is plugged in when Mobile Office mode is being activated, you will be asked
whether you want to start Mobile Office mode. If you enter Yes, the device is restarted
with the data on the USB stick.
127
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Saving Mobile Office data on the USB stick
You can save your phone settings and your local directory on the USB stick so you can use
them on a different phone or workstation.
¤ Click on the Save button next to Save phone settings to USB stick to save your phone
settings.
¤ Click on the Save button next to Save directory to USB stick to save your local directory.
Loading data for Mobile Office from the USB stick onto the phone
¤ Click on the Restore button next to Transfer mobile office data from USB stick to save
the data on the USB stick to your local directory.
Using a USB stick to expand the memory
You can use a USB stick both to expand the device memory and for data backup.
By default, the USB mode is set to Memory Expansion. As soon as you connect a USB stick
a DE900_IP_PRO directory is created automatically with subdirectories for the different
kinds of data, if it does not already exist. In case the directory already exists the contained
resources, e.g. pictures, ringtones, ...) are available in the corresponding telephone menues.
¤ Select the type of data you want to save or restore from the Resources for backup or
Version 2, 27.05.2010
restore list: Directory, Ringtones, Pictures, Call Records, Vcard pictures or Phone settings (Configfile)
Save data on USB stick
¤ Click on Save next to Save data on USB stick.
The data for the data type selected under Resources for backup or restore is copied to
the relevant directory on the USB stick.
Transfer data from USB stick to device
¤ Click on Restore next to Transfer data from USB stick to device.
The data for the data type selected under Resources for backup or restore is transferred
from the relevant directory on the USB stick to the resource directory on your phone.
Existing data is overwritten.
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the USB Mode and Data Transfer screen.
128
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
WLAN
You can connect your phone wirelessly to the local network if you have a WLAN access
point in your network. The Gigaset DE900 IP PRO has an integrated WLAN client in accordance with the IEEE 802.11b/g/n standard and can establish wireless connections with a
maximum data transfer rate of 150 Mbit/s. Encryption in line with WiFi security requirements is supported.
Please note
If you use the WLAN function, you must connect your phone to the mains power supply (£ Page 15).
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ WLAN
¤ Select the On option if you want to use WLAN.
You must now connect your phone to a wireless network. To do this, you can search the
network environment for wireless networks or enter the required network manually.
To establish a connection you need to know the network name and the key.
Scan survey
¤ Select Automatically for Scan Survey if you want the network environment to be
Version 2, 27.05.2010
scanned for wireless networks and click on Start Scan.
The networks found in WLAN range will be shown with the following information:
129
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Network Name
Encryption
Signal Strength
Name of the network, also called SSID.
Uses the ˝ icon to indicate whether the network is encrypted.
Uses icons to indicate the signal strength for the network in question.
For example: ª = very good, i = medium, Ò = very poor
¤ Select the Register option next to the entry for the required wireless network.
¤ Enter the Network Key (PSK) for the network.
Entering a network manually
If no network is shown on the list, you can also enter the data for the required network
manually.
¤ Select Manual for Scan Survey and enter the Network Name (SSID) and Network Key
(PSK) for the network that you want to connect your phone to.
Setting the transmission power
¤ Select the Sending Power: 100%, 75%, 50% or 25%.
The lower you set the transmission power, the lower the range of the WLAN signal for
your device. A low transmission power protects against unauthorised call screening. A
transmission power that is too low, however, can result in lost connections. You only
set the transmission power for the phone here, not for the access point or other
devices in your WLAN.
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to establish the connection to the selected WLAN and to save your set-
Version 2, 27.05.2010
tings on the WLAN screen.
130
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Bluetooth
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO can use Bluetooth™ to communicate wirelessly with other
devices also using this technology. You can connect a headset or a mobile phone.
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ Bluetooth
Before you can use your Bluetooth devices, you must first activate Bluetooth. The function
is not activated by default.
¤ Activate the Bluetooth function on your phone using the Bluetooth Radio option.
The ò icon appears in the display when the phone's Bluetooth function is activated.
Registering Bluetooth devices
You will now search for Bluetooth devices in range that you want to allow to connect to
the base station. Move the headset or mobile phone that you want to connect close to
your phone.
¤ Click on Start.
The Bluetooth devices found in range are displayed with the Device Name and Device
Type:
Device Type: l Handset
ô Headset
¤ Select the Register option next to the entry for the required device.
¤ You can change the name for the device in the Device Name field. Here you specify the
name that will be used to display the device in your Bluetooth network.
¤ Enter the Enter Authentication PIN for the device if necessary.
¤ Click on Trust Device if you want to allow a connection to this device.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Please note
While the Bluetooth function on your phone is activated, all registered Bluetooth
devices can register, but only one at a time.
131
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Defining Bluetooth data for your own device (phone)
¤ Enter the Device Name for your phone in the Bluetooth network. The IP address for
¤
your phone is displayed as the Device address.
Select No for Broadcast name if the device should not be displayed with the device
name in the Bluetooth network. The default setting is Yes.
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the Bluetooth screen.
DECT
You can register a DECT handset or a DECT headset to your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO.
Settings ¢ Network and Connections ¢ DECT
Registering a DECT device
To register a device via DECT you must set your phone to DECT registration mode.
¤ Select the On option.
¤ Enter the Registration PIN in the field for the device that you want to register.
The default setting for Gigaset devices is 0000.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Start registration.
Your phone is now in DECT registration mode. DECT devices can register within 60 seconds. You should also start registration on the handset. Information about this can be
found in the user guide for your DECT device.
The phone's DECT function remains activated for as long as a device is connected via
DECT. The ¼ icon appears in the display when the DECT function is activated.
132
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
De-registering a DECT device
¤ Click on OK next to Deregister DECT device to de-register a device connected via
DECT.
Activating/deactivating Eco Mode
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO is equipped with the environmentally friendly Eco Mode+ for
DECT operation. When you activate Eco Mode+, the radiation (DECT transmission power)
of the phone in idle status is switched off.
¤ Activate or deactivate the Eco Mode+ option.
The DECT icon ¼ appears in the display in green if Eco Mode+ is activated.
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the DECT screen.
Telephony
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The Telephony menu provides the following setting options:
u Connections (£ Page 134)
This is where you can configure your VoIP connections and establish new connections.
u Voice quality (£ Page 137)
On this screen you can optimise the voice quality of your VoIP connections.
u Call divert (£ Page 139)
On this screen you can define options for call divert and activate or deactivate this
function.
u Dialling plans (£ Page 139)
The Dialling Plans screen is where you can define the use of area codes and VoIP connections for outgoing phone calls and enter the international and local area code for
your phone connection.
u Do not disturb (DND) (£ Page 141)
You can use the blacklists to block incoming calls from selected numbers and also to
block all anonymous calls.
u Call live recording (£ Page 141)
This is where you define where recordings of conversations are saved.
u Voice mail services (£ Page 142)
On this screen you can configure your network mailbox.
133
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Connections
You can establish up to 12 telephony connections (VoIP accounts) for your phone, plus a
connection for a mobile phone.
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections
On this screen you can
– Set up a new connection via Auto Configuration
– See the status of the configured connections
– Activate or deactivate individual connections
– Define which of the connections are used by default for outgoing calls
– Change the configuration of connections or establish new connections
– Delete existing connections.
Setting up a new connection via Auto Configuration
¤ If you want to set up a new connection and your provider allows automatic configuration for the account, click on Start.
When the process is complete, the connection is displayed in the list.
Connections for the Gigaset DE900 IP PRO
The following information is shown for each configured connection:
Name/ Name or number of the VoIP connection / Name of the VoIP provider
Provider
Status
Status of the connection. The following statuses are possible:
Registered
The connection is registered with the provider.
Not registered
The connection is not registered with the provider.
Registration failed An error occurred during registration.
Server not acces- The registrar server specified during configuration is not
sible
available.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Disabled
The connection is deactivated.
134
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Activating/deactivating connections
Only activated connections can be used for Internet telephony.
¤ To use a configured connection, select Active.
Specifying a default line for outgoing calls
¤ Select Default Send Account for the connection that you want to use as the default
line for your phone calls. Only one can be selected.
Establishing new connections or editing existing ones
¤ Click on Edit in the row of a configured connection to change its configuration.
¤ Click on Edit in a row without a configured connection to establish a new connection.
Only one connection can be configured at a time for mobile phones.
Configuring the connections
To do this you need the relevant information about your provider for Internet telephony.
¤ In the Connection Name or Number field enter a name of your choice or the phone
number for this connection.
¤ Click on Start Profile Download to load a provider profile.
An assistant opens to guide you through the next steps.
¤ Select your Country and in the next step your Provider.
¤ If your provider is not in the list, select Other Provider.
¤ Click on Finish.
The selected provider profile is loaded.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Entering personal provider data
Now enter your personal login data that you received from your VoIP provider.
¤ Enter the following data:
– Authentication Name
– Authentication Password
– Username
– Display Name
Advanced settings
You can find further parameters for configuring your VoIP connection under Advanced
Settings.
¤ Click on Show next to Advanced Settings.
You will find detailed information on configuring a VoIP account in the section entitled
Configuring a VoIP account on Page 108.
Counting missed and accepted calls
Missed and accepted calls for this VoIP account are recorded in the call lists for the phone
if this function is activated (£ Page 43).
¤ Open the Advanced Settings area.
¤ Select Yes for Missed/accepted calls count if you want to deactivate this function. The
default setting is No.
135
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Settings for ringer
For each connection, you can define the ring tone.
¤ Open the Advanced Settings area.
¤ Select a Melody.
¤ Click on Test to play back the selected melody.
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings for the connection.
Deleting a connection
¤ Click on Delete connection to delete the displayed connection.
Phone connection for a mobile phone
The connection for a mobile phone that is connected to the Gigaset DE900 IP PRO via
Bluetooth is shown as 13th connection on the Connections screen.
Only one connection can be established for one mobile phone.
The following information is displayed for the configured connection for the handset:
Name/Pro- Name or number for the mobile phone connection / Name of the provider
vider
Status
Status of the connection:
Registered
The handset is registered.
Not registered
The handset is not registered.
Connected
The handset has established a connection.
Establishing a new connection or editing an existing one
¤ Click on Edit to change an existing connection or establish a new one.
Configuring the connection
¤ Enter a name of your choice or the phone number for this connection.
¤ Enter the authentication for the Bluetooth connection in the Bluetooth PIN field.
Setting a ringer for the mobile phone
¤ Select a Melody.
¤ Click on Test to play back the selected melody.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
136
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Voice quality
The voice quality of your VoIP calls is determined by the codec used for the transmission.
To increase the quality, more data must be transmitted. Depending on the bandwidth of
your DSL connection, this can then lead to problems with the volume of data – especially
if two VoIP calls are made simultaneously – so that the transmission no longer takes place
smoothly. The following settings allow you to adjust your Gigaset to your individual DSL
connection.
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Voice Quality
You can set the following parameters for the voice quality:
Packed time for RTP packages
¤ Select the interval for sending RTP packets (20 or 30 ms).
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) is a protocol for the continuous transmission of
audiovisual data (streams) via IP-based networks.
Voice quality
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Select the voice quality that matches the bandwidth of your DSL connection.
– Optimised for high bandwidth
– Optimised for low bandwidth
– Select Own Codec preference if you want to determine the codecs yourself.
Both parties involved in a phone connection (caller/sender and recipient) must use the
same voice codec. The voice codec is negotiated between the sender and the recipient
when establishing a connection. You can influence the voice quality by selecting (bearing
in mind the bandwidth of your Internet connection) the voice codecs your phone is to
use, and specifying the order in which the codecs are to be suggested when a VoIP connection is established.
¤ Select the required codecs and define the sequence in which they should be used.
137
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
The following voice codecs are supported by your phone:
G.722
The broadband voice codec G.722 works at the same bit rate as G.711 (64
kbit/s per voice connection) but at a higher sampling rate (16 kHz) and therefore provides excellent sound quality.
G.711 a law/G.711 μ law
Excellent voice quality (comparable with ISDN). The necessary bandwidth is
64 kbit/s per voice connection.
G.726
Good voice quality (inferior to that with G.711 but better than with G.729).
Your phone supports G.726 with a transmission rate of
32 kbit/s per voice connection.
iLbc
Average voice quality. This codec works with 30-ms or 20-ms blocks. The data
rate is 13.33 kbit/s (30-ms blocks) or 15.2 kbit/s (20-ms blocks).
G.729A Average voice quality. The necessary bandwidth is less than or equal to
8 kbit/s per voice connection.
Silence suppression
Silence suppression means that no data packets are sent during a pause in speaking. This
means a lower data volume but call participants may interpret it as an interruption to the
connection.
¤ Select No if you do not want silence suppression. The default setting is Yes.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
138
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Call divert
For each configured VoIP account you can automatically forward incoming calls to
another phone number.
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Call Divert
¤ Specify for the VoIP account when a call should be diverted.
None
No call divert
All
Call divert for all incoming calls
No Answer
Call divert if you do not answer the call
In the Waiting time for no answer (value range: 1 - 600 sec) field
enter the time in seconds after which call divert is to be activated.
When Busy
Call divert if you are currently speaking to another participant
¤ Enter the Phone Number to which calls are to be forwarded.
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
Dialling plans
You can use dialling plans to define which phone numbers should be called using which
configured VoIP account and whether an area code should be dialled first.
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Dialling Plans
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Enter the Phone Number that the dialling plan is to apply to.
¤ Select Use Area Codes if you want to call this number with an area code.
¤ Select the connection that should be used to call this phone number.
¤ Enter a name for this dialling plan in the Comment field.
¤ Click on Add to add the rule to the list.
¤ Click on Delete to delete a rule from the list.
¤ Select Active if you want to activate the rule.
139
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Area codes
Save the complete area code (with international code) for the area in which you are using
the phone. In general, you must always dial the area code for VoIP calls – even for local
calls. To avoid having to dial the area code for local calls, your phone prefixes all VoIP calls
in the local area with the area code entered, i.e., all numbers that do not begin with 0 –
even when dialling numbers from the directory and other lists.
Exceptions: Numbers for which you have defined dialling plans here.
¤ Select your Country. The fields under International show the Prefix and the Code
Number for the selected country.
¤ Below Local, enter the Prefix of your phone and the Code Number for your location.
Enter the full area code for the city that you are calling from. Otherwise errors may
occur with phone connections or during data exchange (e.g., between a fixed line network and a mobile network).
Access code
The prefix is automatically added to numbers during dialling.
¤ Define when it should be used:
– None (if you do not use an access code)
– With numbers from Directory & Call lists
– With All numbers
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the Dialling Plans screen.
140
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Do not disturb (DND)
Block individual phone numbers and/or all anonymous calls. You will then be unavailable
for these calls; your phone will not ring.
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Do Not Disturb
¤ Select Yes to activate the Do Not Disturb function.
¤ Enter the Name and Phone Number for the call.
¤ Click on Add to save the entry to the do not disturb list.
¤ Click on Delete to delete an entry.
¤ Click on Delete all to delete all entries.
¤ Click on Block anonymous caller to block all anonymous calls.
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on this screen.
Call live recording
On this screen you define where call records should be saved.
You can start call records with the F key(£ Page 37) You can play recorded calls back
via the display menu (£ Page 58).
Call records of up to 30 minutes are saved on the phone's internal memory. If you wish to
record two-way calls for longer than 30 minutes, you will need to connect a USB storage
device. If your network has a server, you can also save call records there.
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Call Live Recording
¤ Select where recorded calls should be saved:
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤
– at USB stick
– at server (in this case, enter the server address)
– at phone
Click on Save to save the settings.
141
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Voice mail services
Some VoIP providers offer answering machines on the network – network mailboxes.
These accept incoming calls on the corresponding VoIP phone number. You can access
voice mails on the network mailbox via the display menu (£ Page 57) or the Message
Centre (£ Page 62).
To record all calls, set up a network mailbox for each of your VoIP accounts.
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Voicemail Services
¤ Enter the Mailbox Number for the VoIP connection and activate the network mailbox.
¤ Click on Save to save the settings.
Messaging
The Messaging menu provides the following setting options:
u E-mail
This is where you enter the data for your e-mail account so that you can receive your
e-mails on the phone.
u MWI light (£ Page 144)
On this screen you can configure the behaviour of the Message Centre key (MWI =
Message Waiting Indication).
E-mail
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Your phone will notify you when new e-mail messages have been received on your
incoming e-mail server. You can use your phone to connect to the incoming e-mail server
and display the sender, date/time of receipt, subject and body of the message for every
e-mail message in the incoming e-mail list.
Prerequisites:
u You have set up an e-mail account with an ISP.
u The incoming e-mail server uses the POP3 protocol.
u You set up the name of the incoming e-mail server and your personal registration data
(account name, password).
If you have already entered the data in the setup assistant, you can change it here.
142
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ E-mail
¤ Enter the data for your e-mail account that you received from your provider when you
¤
¤
¤
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤
set up your e-mail account:
– Authentication Name
– Authentication Password
– POP3 Server
Select from the Check for new e-mail list to specify how often you want new e-mails
to be retrieved. You can choose from various values between Every 15 minutes and
Once per day.
Select whether e-mails that you delete on your phone (£ Page 61) should also be
deleted on the server. Default setting: They are only deleted on the phone.
Select whether e-mails should be transmitted via a Security Connection (SSL). If Yes,
indicate the Server Port for the secure connection.
In this case you can only access the message via the display menu, not via the Message
Centre key (£ Page 59).
Click on Save to save the settings.
143
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
MWI light
The Message Centre allows you to access your voice mails, missed calls, e-mails and
missed alarms at the press of a key (E) (£ Page 62). This key flashes if a new message
has been received. You can switch the flashing on or off for every message type. (MWI =
Message Waiting Indication)
Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ MWI Light
¤ Select the message type for which the receipt of a new message should be indicated
¤
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤
by a flashing Message Centre key.
– Missed Calls
– E-mail
– Voice Mail
– Missed Alarms
Select whether the MWI notification (the receipt of a new message) should also be
indicated by a beep (beep) or only by flashing (silent).
Click on Save to save the settings.
144
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Services
The Services menu offers the following functions:
u Configuring info services
u Assigning an online directory (£ Page 148)
u Assigning an LDAP directory (£ Page 150)
Info services
On this screen you can activate the IP Info Services function, select the info services for
your phone and the stations for Internet radio.
You can access info services via the info centre key D (£ Page 68) or you can use them
as a screensaver (£ Page 78).
Settings ¢ Services ¢ IP Info Services
Activating the info services function
¤ Click on Yes to activate the IP Info Services function and allow it for your phone.
Selecting RSS feeds as an info service
You can enter the data for an RSS feed directly or search for RSS feeds in a specific category in a specific country.
¤ First select the Country of the provider of the required service.
¤ Select the news topic: Headlines, Entertainment, Computer, Sports, Business, Sci-
ence and Technology.
The services that you have already selected are listed under Current selection.
¤ If you know the name and the URL for the required RSS feed, enter them in the empty
fields and click on Add.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Delete if you want to remove a news service from the current selection list.
145
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
All the RSS feeds that have been found for the selected country and category are shown
under Library of RSS feed providers.
¤ Select the required RSS feed from the table and click on Add. The entry is copied to the
Current selection.
¤ Click on Save to save your settings.
Selecting a weather service
Weather services that have already been configured are shown with City / Location, State
and Country.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Enter the name of a city or a location and click on Search.
¤ Select your choice from the list of cities found and click on Add.
¤ Click on Delete to remove an entry from the list.
¤ Click on Save to save your settings.
146
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Selecting an info service for the screensaver
You can set up an info service as a screensaver.
The screensaver is activated via
u The display menu Settings ¢ Display ¢ Screensaver (£ Page 78) or
u The Web configurator menu Settings ¢ System ¢ Display (£ Page 155).
This is where you define which info service should be used as the screensaver.
¤ Highlight News or Weather. Only one can be selected.
¤ Select the required news provider or the required region for the weather reports.
¤ Click on Save to save your settings.
Selecting stations for Internet Radio
¤ Select Yes for Activate Internet Radio.
The stations listed here are available for selection if you access the Internet radio function
in the phone's display menu (£ Page 67). You can add new stations or delete existing
ones from the list.
¤ Enter the name and the Internet address (URL) for the required station in the empty
fields at the end of the list and click on Add.
¤ Click on Delete if you want to remove a station from the list.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the IP Info Services screen.
147
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Online directory
If you want to use an online directory (£ Page 53), select the provider on this screen who
supplies the directory on the Internet. Also specify which service you want to use.
Settings ¢ Services ¢ Online Directory
The available provider directories are displayed.
¤ Select the providers whose online directories you want to use by selecting the check
boxes under Select.
¤ If you select the Automatic look-up option, when a call comes in the online service
automatically looks up the name of the caller in the online directory. This function
must be available for the provider directory.
Configuring an additional provider
¤ To use the online services of another provider, enter the access data under Settings for
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤
additional provider:
– Provider Name
– Server Address
– Username
– Password
Select the service(s) you want to use:
– White Pages
public directory supplied on the Internet by the provider entered above
– Yellow Pages
yellow pages supplied on the Internet by the provider entered above
– Private NetDirectory
directory managed by yourself, if enabled by your provider
148
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
You can enable one, two or all three services.
¤ Enter a name for each of the selected services in the Name of directory field. This is the
name under which the directory will be displayed on your device (£ Page 53).
¤ Choose whether to allow Automatic look-up in each case.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the Online Directory screen.
149
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
LDAP directory
If your corporate network provides a directory via an LDAP server, you can access this on
your phone (LDAP = Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). You can set up the function
on this screen. You will need information about the configuration of the LDAP server to
do this.
Settings ¢ Services ¢ LDAP
¤ Enter a name in the Name of directory field. This is the name under which the directory will be displayed on your device (£ Page 52).
¤ Enter all the data for your LDAP server and the directory:
LDAP Name Filter
LDAP Number Filter
LDAP filters can be used to specify criteria for searches for
specific objects in the directory, e.g., all users whose first
name starts with "A" or all users whose post code begins
with a specific number and who have not set the display
name attribute etc.
LDAP Name Attributes
Defines which information should be delivered as the
search result for the search by name, e.g., surname only, surname and first name etc.
LDAP Number AttributesDefines which information should be delivered as the
search result for the search by number, e.g., fixed line network number only, mobile phone number and IP phone
number etc.
LDAP Display Name
Format for displaying names.
Server Address
IP address for the LDAP server in your network.
Server Port
Port number that is used to provide the LDAP service. The
default setting is 389
LDAP Search Base
Range in the hierarchical LDAP database where the search
begins. All areas have defined designations.
Username
Access ID for the LDAP server.
Password
Password for the access ID to the LDAP server.
Max. Hits
Maximum number of search results to be displayed. The
default setting is 50
¤ Select Yes for LDAP lookup for incoming calls if a search should be made for a caller
in the LDAP directory instead of in the local directory.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on this screen.
150
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Function keys
On this screen you can set up the key light, decide on the assignment of the directory key
and programme the function keys.
Settings ¢ Function Keys
Activating/deactivating the key light
¤ Select if and when the Key Light should be activated. This is the backlight for all keys,
not just the function keys.
Possible settings: Off, Always on, On in use
Assigning the directory key
You can use the directory key Z (navigation key s) to open the local directory by
default (£ Page 47). You can change this setting.
¤ Select which directory you want to access with the Directory Key:
– Local Directory (local directory £ Page 47)
– LDAP (corporate directory £ Page 52)
Programmable keys
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Your Gigaset DE900 IP PRO allows you to assign frequently used functions or phone numbers to up to 14 keys so that you can access them with one key press. You can increase the
number of function keys by connecting extension modules (£ Page 17).
All available function keys are shown with the Phone Number and Key setting.
¤ Click on Edit to assign a phone number or function to a Key. The window for programming the selected key will open.
151
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤ Select the required function from the Function Select list.
Line
Assigns a specific connection to the function key. You can use the key to make
a call via this connection or to answer an incoming call for this connection.
The key flashes if a call comes in and lights up if the line is busy.
¤ Select the required connection. All configured connections are displayed
for you to choose from (£ Page 134).
Park + Orbit
This function key is used to “park” a call. The participant hears the hold music.
This function key allows you to transfer calls within a group, which share a
common line. It will be configured on all extensions for the group. The "Park +
Orbit" keys on all extensions flash if a call has been "parked" on an extension.
The call can be picked up on any extension by pressing the key.
¤ Enter the Phone Number of the shared line that is configured on the
phone system as identifier.
Speed Dial
Assigns the speed dial for a phone number to the function key.
¤ Enter the phone number that is to be dialled using this function key.
BLF
A function key that is configured as BLF (Busy Lamp Field) indicates the status
of a shared line. It will be configured on all extensions for the group. The keys
will flash on all extensions if a call comes in and light up if the line on any
extension is busy. No actions are possible for this key.
¤ Enter the Phone Number of the shared line that is configured on the
phone system as identifier.
Call Divert
Assigns a call divert to the function key.
¤ Enter the connection for which you want the call divert to apply and enter
the Phone Number to which the calls are to be diverted.
The call divert set up here applies to all calls. To configure different call-divert
rules, use the screen Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Call Divert (£ Page 139).
None
Nothing assigned
¤ Click on Save to accept the key assignment.
You will now be returned to the Function Keys screen, where you can programme more
keys.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
152
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
System settings
You can create the following settings in the System menu:
u Define the date and time or time server
u Change the security passwords for administrator and user identification (£ Page 154)
u Set the idle display, screensaver and brightness for the display (£ Page 155)
u Load ringers and pictures (£ Page 157)
u Restart the device and restore factory settings (£ Page 158)
u Save and restore telephone data (£ Page 158)
u Perform and configure a firmware update (£ Page 159)
Date and time
On this screen you can specify a time server or enter the date and time manually.
Settings ¢ System ¢ Date and Time
Defining the time server
¤ Select Yes for Automatic adjustment of system time with time server.
¤ Enter the IP address for the required time server in the Time Server field.
The most recent synchronisation carried out with the time server is shown.
Entering the date and time manually
¤ Select No for Automatic adjustment of system time with time server..
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Enter the Date and Time:
– Time format: ss:mm
– Date format: dd.mm.yyyy
153
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤ Click on Assume to save your settings.
If you have changed the date format in the System ¢ Display menu, enter the date here
as well in the mm.dd.yyyy format (£ Page 156).
Setting the time zone
¤ Select your Time Zone from the list.
¤ Activate the Automatically adjust clock to summer time changes option if necessary.
Saving settings
¤ Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
Security
Access to the Web configurator is password-protected for security purposes.
Default settings:
User name
Administrator
User
Password
admin
user
Settings ¢ System ¢ Security
On this screen you can change the passwords for administrator identification and user
identification. For security reasons, you should always do this after getting started with
your device and then at regular intervals.
¤ Enter the old password.
¤ Enter a new password in the field below and repeat it in the Confirm New Password
field.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
154
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Display
On this screen you can configure a range of settings for your phone display.
Settings ¢ System ¢ Display
Display screen in idle status
In idle status, the display shows either the Idle Display or a Screensaver. The difference is
that the Idle Display only covers the lower part of the display; the display icons are still
visible in the upper part. The Screensaver covers the full screen
¤ Choose the required Idle Display or Screensaver from the list. If no screensaver is set,
Idle Display is selected.
Possible displays:
For the idle display:
Time Zones, Analog Clock, Digital Clock, Calendar, Pictures
For the screensaver:
No Screensaver, Analog Clock, Digital Clock, Calendar, Pictures, Info Service
¤ If you have selected the Pictures option, you must now choose one or more pictures.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤
Multiple pictures are shown in sequence as a slide show.
All pictures in the phone's resource directory are available to choose from. You can
download your own pictures from the PC to your phone (£ Page 157).
If you have selected Info Service as a Screensaver, the info service that you have
defined on the IP Info Services screen will be activated as the screensaver
(£ Page 147).
155
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Setting the display brightness
You can set the display brightness at seven levels and turn the display off completely at
specific times, e.g., at night. These measures help to optimise the power consumption of
your device.
¤ Select the Brightness of the display from 1 to 7. 1 = dark ... 7 = very bright.
¤ Select On for Time Control if you want to turn the display off.
¤ Enter the start and end of the period when the display should be switched off.
Defining the format for the display screen
¤ Select your required setting:
Device Language
Language for the display screens
Web Interface Language Language for the Web configurator
Tone Scheme
Different countries have different conventions for ringer
settings, e.g., for the dialling tone, the busy tone etc. Select
the country of the ringer schedule you want to use.
Date Format
The format that the date is shown in:
24-hour clock
Sort Criteria Directory
dd.mm.yyyy
e.g., 03.12.2010 for 3 December 2010
mm.dd.yyyy
e.g., 02.17.2010 for 17 February 2010
Select the format for the time display:
On
time is displayed in 24-hour format:
e.g., 18:15
Off
time is displayed in 12-hour format:
e.g., 6:15 PM
Select whether your local directory should be sorted by
first names or surnames.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
156
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Loading ringers and pictures
You can download ringers and pictures from the PC to the device's resource directory. The
data on the PC must be in the following formats:
Type
Format
Size
Sounds
mp3
Max. 2 MB
Pictures
– Picture
– Vcard picture (CLIP)
JPG
320 x 240 pixels
64 x 78 pixels
Max. 250 KB
Max. 250 KB
Settings ¢ System ¢ Upload Tones and Pictures
¤ Click on Browse next to Ringtone file. Navigate to the storage location of the sound
files in the file system on the PC and select the required file.
¤ Enter a Name for the ringer and click on Store.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
You can download pictures for the display and Vcards from the PC to the device's resource
directory in the same way.
¤ Click on Browse next to Image File. Navigate to the storage location of the picture files
in the file system on the PC and select the required file.
¤ Enter a Name for the picture and click on Store.
157
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Rebooting and resetting to factory settings
You may have to reboot your phone in certain operational situations, for instance to save
changes you have made.
Settings ¢ System ¢ Reboot and Reset
¤ Click on OK next to Reboot to reboot the system.
All phone settings can be reset to the Factory settings. This deletes all settings, lists and
directory entries!
¤ Click on OK next to Start factory reset to reset the phone to the default settings.
Saving and restoring telephone data
You can save data from your phone onto your PC and, if necessary, restore it back onto the
phone.
Settings ¢ System ¢ Save and Restore
Transferring data from phone to PC
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Select which data you want to save:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Directory
Vcard pictures
Ringtones
Pictures
Call Records
Phone settings (Configfile) (configuration file)
158
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤ Click Save to save the selected data to the PC and choose a storage location.
Transferring data from PC to phone
¤ Use the Browse button to select the file you want from your PC’s file system, or enter
the complete path name of the file in the Transfer data from PC to device field.
¤ Click on Restore.
Updating firmware
Firmware updates are available from the Gigaset website www.gigaset.com/pro so you
can ensure your phone is always up to date. You can find the current version of your
firmware on the Device status screen (Page 161). You can update your phone automatically or manually. Your provider for Internet telephony can also deliver updates for the
phone firmware and/or for the profile of your VoIP account.
Any PC connected to the phone will not be able to access the local network and the Internet during the firmware update.
Settings ¢ System ¢ Firmware Update
Updating firmware automatically
¤ Select Yes for Automatic check for software updates and/or Automatic check for
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤
¤
profile updates.
Enter the Web address for the automatic update search in the Data server field.
Click on Update firmware to start the search and to load the new firmware.
159
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Updating manually
¤ Download the new firmware from the Internet onto your PC and then open the
firmware update screen.
¤ Select No for Automatic check for software updates and/or Automatic check for profile updates.
¤ Click on Browse and select the file from the file system on your PC.
¤ Click on Load to start the update process.
When the firmware update is started, the device first checks whether the prerequisites are
in place for successfully downloading the firmware. A successful update is indicated by an
advisory message.
Saving settings
Version 2, 27.05.2010
¤ Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
160
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Checking the status of the phone
Checking the status of the phone
You will find information about the status of the phone and diagnostic information in the
Status menu.
Device
Status ¢ Device
This screen shows general information about your phone.
IP Configuration
IP Address
The phone's current IP address within the local network.
MAC Address LAN
The phone's device address.
MAC Address WLAN
Device address for the WLAN connection.
MAC Address Bluetooth
Device address for the Bluetooth connection.
DECT, Eco Mode+
WLAN, WLAN Encryption
Bluetooth
Each of these functions shows
whether they are activated or not.
Status mobile phone
Whether or not the mobile phone is connected.
Software
Firmware Version
Version of the firmware currently loaded on the phone. You
can download updates of the firmware to your phone
(£ Page 126).
VoIP status
List of all configured VoIP connections with the Name, Status and which connection is
configured as the Default Send Account.
Date and time
Current Time and Date in the device and the date of the last synchronisation with the
time server.
System Log
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Status ¢ System Log
System events e.g., system start, assigning an IP address etc., are recorded in the system
log. This screen shows the system log. The events are displayed with the Date, Time and
Message. This information may be useful in the event of problems involving Customer
Care.
¤ Click on Reload to update the display.
¤ Click on Delete all entries to delete the entries.
161
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 11/4/10
Checking the status of the phone
SIP protocol
Status ¢ SIP Protocol
SIP logging stores information about the set-up and disconnection of phone connections
and about registering your phone.
This information is useful for diagnosing errors and can be of use to Customer Care for
problem solving.
¤ Click on Reload to update the display.
¤ Click on Delete all entries to delete the entries.
PCAP logging
Status ¢ PCAP Logging
On this screen you can create a PCAP log file and save it for analysis at a later stage. PCAP
(Packet Capture) analyses the data traffic in the network at the phone-Ethernet interface.
This recording is carried out for diagnostic purposes and should only be made if
requested by service personnel.
¤ Click on Start. Every incoming or outgoing data packet to or from your phone is
recorded.
¤ Click on Stop to stop recording.
¤ To save the PCAP file (pcapdump.pcap), click on Store and select a directory in the file
system on your PC where the file should be stored.
Please note
u The information is recorded in a ring buffer that has limited storage capacity. If the
buffer is full, the first packets will be overwritten and lost. You should therefore
attempt to record scenarios that are as short as possible.
u This logging uses a lot of memory and CPU power and can negatively affect how
the phone behaves (e.g., slowing the display screen, distorting the ringer etc.)
Checking storage allocation
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Status ¢ Storage Allocation
This shows you how much storage capacity is still available on your phone.
162
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
Appendix
Caring for your telephone
Wipe the unit with a damp cloth or an antistatic cloth. Do not use solvents or microfibre
cloths.
Never use a dry cloth; this can cause static.
Using insert strips
The phone is supplied with insert strips for the function keys. If you require more blank
insert strips for the function keys, they are available as a PDF file on the product CD supplied.
Using Gigaset QuickSync – additional functions for the
PC interface
You can synchronise your handset directory with Outlook. The Gigaset QuickSync program must be installed on your computer to do so. The program is provided on the product CD.
Specifications
LAN
2 port LAN switch: 10 Mbit, 100 Mbit, 1Gbit
USB 2.0
type A, high/full/low host interface
Bluetooth®
Class 2, IEEE 802.15.1, HFP, HSP
DECT
GAP, CAT-iq1.0, EcoMode+
WLAN Standards
IEEE 802.11b,g,n
Headset connections
Bluetooth®, DECT, corded
Power supply
100–240 V, ~50/60 Hz
Power over Ethernet
PoE, IEEE 802.3af, class 3
Power consumption (standby)
4.6 W
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Environmental conditions in opera- ±0°C to +45°C,
tion
10% to 95% relative humidity
Language codecs
G.711 μ-law/a-law, G.722, G.726, G.729AB, iLbc
Quality of Service (QoS)
RSVP/DiffServ (RFC2474, RFC2475)
VoIP protocols
SIP (RFC3261, RFC2543), RTP
VoIP security
SRTP (RFC3711), TLS (RFC2246), SIPS
Internet protocols
IPv4 (RFC0791), IPv6(RFC2460)
Further protocols
STUN, ICE, TCP, DHCP
163
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
Service (Customer Care)
You have questions? You can find help quickly in this User Manual and at
www.gigaset.com/pro. If you have further queries regarding your Gigaset Professional
phone system please contact the dealer you bought your phone system from.
Questions and answers
If you have any queries about the use of your telephone, visit our website at
www.gigaset.com/pro for assistance.
Authorisation
This device, in combination with an external modem, is intended for connection to your
telecomunications network ( LAN IEEE 802.3 )
This device is intended for use within the European Economic Area and Switzerland. If
used in other countries, it must first be approved nationally in the country in question.
Cet appareil est destinée pour une utilisation domestique en France.
Country-specific requirements have been taken into consideration.
We, Gigaset Communications GmbH, declare that this device meets the essential requirements and other relevant regulations laid down in Directive 1999/5/EC.
A copy of the 1999/5/EC Declaration of Conformity is available at this Internet address:
www.gigaset.com/docs
Protecting our environment
Our environmental mission statement
Version 2, 27.05.2010
We, Gigaset Communications GmbH, bear social responsibility and are actively committed to a better world. Our ideas, technologies and actions serve people, society and the
environment. The aim of our global activity is to secure sustainable life resources for
humanity. We are committed to taking responsibility for our products throughout their
entire life cycle. The environmental impact of products, including their manufacture, procurement, distribution, use, service and disposal, is evaluated early on, during product
and process design.
Further information on environmentally friendly products and processes is available on
the Internet at www.gigaset.com.
164
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
Environmental management system
Gigaset Communications GmbH is certified according to the international standards EN 14001 and ISO 9001.
ISO 14001 (Environment): Certified since September 2007 by TüV SÜD
Management Service GmbH.
ISO 9001 (Quality): Certified since 17/02/1994 by TüV Süd Management
Service GmbH.
Disposal
Version 2, 27.05.2010
All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal
waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the
local authorities.
This crossed-out wheeled bin symbol on the product means the product
is covered by the European Directive 2002/96/EC.
The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and
human health. It is a precondition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.
For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please contact your
local council refuse centre or the original supplier of the product.
165
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
Using free software
GNU GPL, GNU LGPL, BSD licence, OpenSSL licence
The Gigaset DE900 IP PRO includes free software that is licensed under the GNU General
Public Licence. This free software was developed by a third party and is protected by
copyright.
The software is provided free of charge. You are authorised to use this free software in
accordance with the above-mentioned licence conditions. In the event of contradictions
between these licence conditions and the Gigaset Communications GmbH licence conditions that apply to the software, the above-mentioned licence conditions shall take precedence for the free software.
The GNU General Public Licence (GPL) is supplied with this product. The licences can be
read in the following chapters.
In addition, you can download the licence conditions from the Internet:
u The GPL is available on the Internet at: www.fsf.org/licensing/licenses/gpl.txt
u Unauthorised translations of the GPL are available on the Internet at:
www.gnu.org/licenses/translations.html
u The source text, including copyright notices for the free software, is available on the
Internet at: www.gigaset.com/opensource
For more information and Internet links to the source text of the free software, see the
Online Support pages on the Internet at:
www.gigaset.com/uk/service or
www.gigaset.com/customercare
Use of the free software included with this product, that goes beyond the program
sequence intended by Gigaset Communications GmbH, shall be at the user's own risk and
no claim based on liability for defects can be made against Gigaset Communications
GmbH. The GNU General Public Licence contains references to the liability for defects of
the authors or other holders of rights to the free software.
You shall have no right to assert a claim against Gigaset Communications GmbH based on
liability for defects if a defect in the product was or could have been caused by changes
you have made to the programs or their configuration. Furthermore, you shall have no
right to assert a claim against Gigaset Communications GmbH based on liability for
defects if the free software violates the copyright of third parties.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Gigaset Communications GmbH shall provide no technical support for the software,
including the free software included within it, if it has been changed.
166
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
Open source software licences
GNU General Public Licence (GPL)
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this licence document,
but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
Version 2, 27.05.2010
The licences for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and
change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licence is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software – to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This General Public Licence applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software
and to any other program where the authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public Licence instead.)
You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licences are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to impose restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate into certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this
licence which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors'
reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid
the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licences, in
effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms
and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
167
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This Licence applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by
the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public
Licence. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on
the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that
is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
Licence; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and
the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is
true depends on what the Program does.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on
each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty, keep intact all the
notices that refer to this Licence and to the absence of any warranty, and give any other
recipients of the Program a copy of this Licence along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may, at your discretion, offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a
work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under
the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at
no charge to all third parties under the terms of this Licence.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you
must cause it, when running is commenced for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright
notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling
the user how to view a copy of this Licence. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that
work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent
and separate works in themselves, then this Licence, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this Licence, in which the permissions for other licensees
extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
168
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this Licence.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above, provided that
you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code,
which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third
party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution,
a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for non-commercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accordance with sub-section b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception,
the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel and so on) of
the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
4. You may not copy, modify, sub-license or distribute the Program except as expressly
provided under this Licence. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sub-license or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
Licence. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
Licence will not have their licences terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
169
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
5. You are not required to accept this Licence, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works.
These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this Licence. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your
acceptance of this Licence to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a licence from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this Licence.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by
court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this Licence, they
do not excuse you from the conditions of this Licence. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this Licence and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent licence would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those
who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this Licence would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the remainder of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is
intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property
right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of
protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by
public licence practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of
that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this Licence.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program are restricted in certain countries either by
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this Licence may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such a case, this Licence incorporates the limitation as if written in the body
of this Licence.
170
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General
Public Licence from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version
number of this Licence which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this
Licence, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs for which the
distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the
two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
Version 2, 27.05.2010
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE
THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL
ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
171
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Appendix
How to apply these terms to your new programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the
start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file
should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of
the GNU General Public Licence as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the Licence, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public Licence for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Licence along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an
interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type 'show w'. This is free
software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type 'show c' for
details.
The hypothetical commands 'show w' and 'show c' should show the appropriate parts of
the General Public Licence. Of course, the commands you use may be called something
other than 'show w' and 'show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items – whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to
sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program 'Gnomovision' (which
makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989, Ty Coon, President of Vice
Version 2, 27.05.2010
This General Public Licence does not permit you to incorporate your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful
to permit linking of proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do,
use the GNU Lesser General Public Licence instead of this Licence.
172
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / appendix.fm / 11/4/10
Accessories
Accessories
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Extension module each with 14 additional programmable keys
For Gigaset DE900 IP PRO: ZY900 PRO
Product number: S30852-S2210-R701
For Gigaset DE700 IP PRO: ZY700 PRO
Product number: S30852-S2211-R701
173
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
Glossary
A
Access point
An access point is the centre of a wireless local network (WLAN). It handles the connection of the wireless linked network components and regulates the data traffic in the
wireless network.
ADSL
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
Special form of DSL.
ALG
Application Layer Gateway
NAT control mechanism of a router.
Many routers with integrated NAT use ALG. ALG lets the data packets in a VoIP connection pass and adds the public IP address of the secure private network.
The router's ALG should be deactivated if the VoIP provider offers a STUN server or an
outbound proxy.
See also: Firewall, NAT, Outbound proxy, STUN.
Authentication
Restriction of access to a network/service by using an ID and password to log in.
Automatic redial
Several attempts to call are made automatically when the line is busy. The number is
adjustable.
B
Block dialling
Enter the complete phone number, and correct it if necessary. Then pick up the
receiver or press the speaker key to dial the phone number.
Broadband Internet access
See DSL.
Buddy
Subscriber with whom you exchange brief messages on the Internet in real time (chatting).
See also: Instant messaging.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
C
Call divert
CD
Automatic diversion (CD) of a call to a different telephone number. There are three
kinds of call divert:
– CDU, Call Divert Unconditional
– CDB, Call Divert Busy
– CDNR, Call Divert No Reply
174
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Call swap
Call swap allows you to switch between two callers or between a conference and an
individual caller without allowing the waiting caller to listen to the call.
Call waiting
= CW. VoIP provider feature. A beep during a call indicates that another caller is waiting. You can accept or reject the second call. You can activate/deactivate the feature.
CD
Call divert
See Call divert.
Chatting
Form of communication on the Internet. During a chat, brief messages are exchanged
between the communicating parties in real time. Chatting in this sense is understood
to be a written form of communication.
Client
Application that requests a service from a server.
CLIP
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Telephony feature. The number of the caller is transferred to the called party's phone
display (if the caller activates this feature). The called party's phone must be compatible with CLIP and the feature must be enabled on the phone port.
Codec
Coder/decoder
Codec is a procedure that digitalises and compresses analogue voice before it is sent
via the Internet, and decodes – i.e., translates into analogue voice – digital data when
voice packets are received. There are different codecs, with differing degrees of compression, for instance.
Both parties involved in the telephone connection (caller/sender and recipient) must
use the same codec. This is negotiated between the sender and the recipient when
establishing a connection.
The choice of codec is a compromise between voice quality, transmission speed and
the necessary bandwidth. A high level of compression, for example, means that the
bandwidth required for each voice connection is low. However, it also means that the
time needed to compress/decompress the data is greater, which increases execution
time for data in the network and thus impairs voice quality. The time required
increases the delay between the sender speaking and the recipient hearing what has
been said.
COLP/COLR
Connected Line Identification Presentation/Restriction
Feature provided by a VoIP connection for outgoing calls.
COLP displays the phone number accepting the call on the calling party's display unit.
The number of the party accepting the call is different to the dialled number, e.g., if the
call is diverted or transferred.
The called party can use COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction) to prevent
the number from appearing on the calling party's display.
175
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
Consultation call
You are on a call. With a consultation call, you interrupt the conversation briefly to
establish a second connection to another participant. If you end the connection to this
participant immediately, then this was a consultation call. If you switch to and fro
between the first and second participants, it is called call swapping.
CW
Call waiting
See Call waiting.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
D
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Internet protocol that regulates the automatic assignment of IP addresses to network
subscribers. The protocol is made available in the network by a server. A DHCP server
can, for example, be a router.
The phone contains a DHCP client. A router that contains a DHCP server can assign the
IP addresses for the phone automatically from a defined address block. This dynamic
assignment means that several network subscribers can share one IP address,
although they use it alternately and not simultaneously.
With some routers you can specify that the IP address for the phone is never changed.
Displayed name
VoIP provider feature. You can specify any name that is to be shown to the other party
during a call instead of your phone number.
DMZ (Demilitarised Zone)
DMZ describes a part of a network that is outside the firewall.
A DMZ is set up, as it were, between a network you want to protect (e.g., a LAN) and a
non-secure network (e.g., the Internet). A DMZ permits unrestricted access from the
Internet to only one or a few network components, while the other network components remain secure behind the firewall.
DNS
Domain Name System
Hierarchical system that permits the assignment of IP addresses to domain names
that are easier to remember. This assignment has to be managed by a local DNS server
in each (W)LAN. The local DNS server determines the IP address, if necessary by
enquiring about superordinate DNS servers and other local DNS servers on the Internet.
You can specify the IP address of the primary/secondary DNS server.
See also: DynDNS.
Domain name
Name of one (several) Web server(s) on the Internet (e.g., www.gigaset.com). The
domain name is assigned to the relevant IP address by DNS.
DSCP
Differentiated Service Code Point
See Quality of Service (QoS).
176
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
Data transfer technology which allows Internet access over conventional phone lines.
Prerequisites: DSL modem and the appropriate service offered by the Internet provider.
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
The DSLAM is a switch cabinet in an exchange at which all subscriber connectors converge.
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
Another description for dual tone multi-frequency dialling (DTMF).
Dynamic IP Address
A dynamic IP address is assigned to a network component automatically via DHCP. The
dynamic IP address for a network component can change every time it registers or at
certain time intervals.
See also: Fixed IP address.
DynDNS
Dynamic DNS
DNS is used to assign domain names and IP addresses. For dynamic IP addresses this
service is now enhanced with Dynamic DNS. This permits the use of a network component with a dynamic IP address as a server on the Internet. DynDNS ensures that a
service can always be addressed on the Internet under the same domain name
regardless of the current IP address.
E
ECT
Explicit Call Transfer
Participant A calls participant B. The participant puts the connection on hold and calls
participant C. Rather than connect everyone in a three-party conference, A now transfers participant B to C and hangs up.
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
Memory building block in your phone with fixed data (e.g., default and customised
settings) and data saved automatically (e.g., call list entries).
Encryption
Encryption protects confidential information against unauthorised access. With an encryption
system, data packets can be sent securely over a network.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Ethernet network
Wired LAN.
Ethernet uses a base band cable for data transmission with a transmission rate of 10 or
100 Mbps or 1 Gbps.
177
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
F
Firewall
You can use a firewall to protect your network against unauthorised external access.
This involves combining various measures and technologies (hardware and/or software) to control the flow of data between a private network you wish to protect and
an unprotected network (e.g., the Internet).
See also: NAT.
Firmware
Device software in which basic information is saved for the functioning of a device. To
correct errors or update the device software, a new version of the firmware can be
loaded into the device's memory (firmware update).
Fixed IP address
A fixed IP address is assigned to a network component manually during network configuration. Unlike a dynamic IP address, a fixed IP address never changes.
Flat rate
System of billing for an Internet connection. The Internet service provider charges a set
monthly fee. There are no additional charges for the duration of the connection or
number of connections.
Fragmentation
Data packets that are too big are split into smaller packets (fragments) before they are
transferred. They are put together again when they reach the recipient (defragmented).
Full duplex
Data transmission is a mode in which data can be sent and received at the same time.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
G
G.711 a law, G.711 μ law
Standard for a codec.
G.711 delivers a very good voice quality that corresponds to that in the ISDN fixed line.
As there is little compression, the necessary bandwidth is around 64 kbit/s per voice
connection, but the delay caused by coding/decoding is only approx. 0.125 ms.
"a law" describes the European standard and "μ law" describes the North American/
Japanese equivalent.
G.722
Standard for a codec.
G.722 is a broadband language codec with a bandwidth of 50 Hz to 7 kHz, a net transmission rate of 64 kbit/s per language connection and integrated speech pause recognition and comfort noise generation (silence suppression).
G.722 delivers very good voice quality. A higher sampling rate provides clearer and
better voice quality than other codecs and enables a speech tone in High Definition
Sound Performance (HDSP).
G.726
Standard for a codec.
G.726 delivers a good voice quality. It is inferior to the quality with codec G.711 but
better than with G.729.
178
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
G.729A/B
Standard for a codec.
The voice quality is more likely to be lower with G.729A/B. As a result of the high level
of compression, the necessary bandwidth is only around 8 kbit/s per voice connection,
but the delay is around 15 ms.
Gateway
Connects two different networks, e.g., a router as an Internet gateway.
For phone calls from VoIP to the telephone network, a gateway has to be connected
to the IP network and the telephone network (gateway/VoIP provider). It forwards calls
from VoIP to the telephone network as required.
Gateway provider
See SIP provider.
Global IP address
See IP address.
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communication
Originally, a European standard for mobile networks. GSM can now be described as a
worldwide standard. However, in the USA and Japan, national standards were previously more frequently supported.
H
Headset
Combination of microphone and headphone. A headset makes using speaker mode
more convenient. Headsets that can be connected to the telephone via a cable are
available.
HTTP proxy
Server via which network subscribers can process their Internet traffic.
Hub
Connects several network subscribers in one infrastructure network. All data sent to
the hub by one network subscriber is forwarded to all network subscribers.
See also: Gateway, Router.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
I
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
International body that defines standards in electronics and electrical engineering,
concerned in particular with the standardisation of LAN technology, transmission protocols, data transfer rate and wiring.
Infrastructure network
Network with central structure: All network subscribers communicate via a central
router.
Instant messaging
Service that uses a client program to allow chatting in real time, i.e., to send brief messages to other subscribers on the Internet.
179
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
Internet
Global WAN. A series of protocols known as TCP/IP have been defined for exchanging
data.
All network subscribers are identifiable by an IP address. DNS assigns a domain name
to the IP address.
Important services on the Internet include the World Wide Web (WWW), e-mail, file
transfer and discussion forums.
Internet service provider
Enables access to the Internet for a fee.
Internet telephony
Voice over IP.
IP (Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP protocol on the Internet. IP is responsible for the addressing of subscribers in a
network using IP addresses, and routes data from a sender to the recipient. IP determines the paths (routing) along which the data packets travel.
There are standard IPv4 and IPv6 protocols; the essential difference is the structure of
the IP addresses.
IP address
A unique address for a network component within a network based on the TCP/IP protocols (e.g., LAN, Internet). On the Internet, domain names are usually assigned
instead of IP addresses. DNS assigns the corresponding IP address to the domain
name.
The IPv4 IP address has four parts (decimal numbers between 0 and 255) separated by
full stops (e.g., 230.94.233.2).
The IP address is made up of the network number and the number of the network subscriber (e.g., phone). Depending on the subnet mask, the first, second or third part
makes up the network number and the rest of the IP address addresses the network
component. The network number of all the components in any one network must be
identical.
IP addresses can be assigned automatically with DHCP (dynamic IP addresses) or manually (static IP addresses).
See also: DHCP.
IP pool range
Range of IP addresses that the DHCP server can use to assign dynamic IP addresses.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
L
LAN
Local Area Network
Network with a restricted physical range. A LAN can be wireless (WLAN) and/or wired
(Ethernet).
LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
Service for managing directories across a network.
LDAP is used to store and access information about individuals who are part of an
organisation (e.g., employees).
180
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
Local IP address
The local or private IP address is the address for a network component in the local network (LAN). The network operator can assign any address he or she wants. Devices that
act as a link from a local network to the Internet (gateway or router) have a public and
a private IP address.
See also IP address.
Local SIP port
See SIP port/Local SIP port.
M
MAC address
Media Access Control address
Hardware address by means of which each network device (e.g., network card, switch,
phone) can be uniquely identified worldwide. It consists of six parts (hexadecimal
numbers) separated by a "-" (e.g., 00-90-65-44-00-3A).
The MAC address is assigned by the manufacturer and cannot be changed.
Mbps
Million bits per second
Unit of the transmission speed in a network.
MRU
Maximum Receive Unit
Defines the maximum user data volume within a data packet.
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
Defines the maximum length of a data packet that can be carried over the network at
a time.
Music on hold
Music is played while you are making a consultation call or call swapping. The waiting
participant hears music while on hold.
N
Version 2, 27.05.2010
NAT
Network Address Translation
Method for converting (private) IP addresses to one or more (public) IP addresses.
With NAT, the IP addresses of network subscribers (e.g., VoIP phones) in a LAN can be
hidden behind a joint IP address for the router in the Internet.
VoIP telephones behind a NAT router cannot be reached by VoIP servers (on account
of the private IP address). To "bypass" NAT it is possible to either use ALG in the router,
STUN in the VoIP telephone or an outbound proxy for the VoIP provider.
If an outbound proxy is made available you must allow for this in the VoIP settings for
your phone.
181
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
Network
Group of devices. Devices can be connected in either wired or wireless mode.
Networks can also differ in range and structure:
– Range: Local networks (LAN) or wide-area networks (WAN)
– Structure: Infrastructure network or ad hoc network
Network subscriber
Devices and PCs that are connected to each other in a network, e.g., servers, PCs and
phones.
O
Outbound proxy
Alternative NAT control mechanism to STUN and ALG.
Outbound proxies are implemented by the VoIP provider in firewall/NAT environments as an alternative to a SIP proxy server. They control data traffic through the firewall.
Outbound proxy and STUN servers should not be used simultaneously.
See also: STUN and NAT.
P
Version 2, 27.05.2010
PIN
Personal Identification Number
Protects against unauthorised use. When the PIN is activated, a number combination
has to be entered to access a protected area.
Port
Data is exchanged between two applications in a network across a port.
Port forwarding
The Internet gateway (e.g., your router) forwards data packets from the Internet to the
port that the data is intended for. This allows servers in the LAN to offer services on the
Internet without you needing a public IP address.
Port number
Indicates a specific application of a network subscriber. Depending on the setting in
the LAN, the port number is permanently assigned or else it is newly assigned with
each access.
The combination of IP address/port number identifies the recipient or sender of a
data packet within a network.
Prepare dialling
See Block dialling.
Private IP address
See Public IP address.
Protocol
Describes the agreements for communicating within a network. It contains rules for
opening, administering and closing a connection, about data formats, time frames
and possible error handling.
182
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
Proxy/Proxy server
Computer program that controls the exchange of data between client and server in
computer networks. If the phone sends a query to the VoIP server, the proxy acts as a
server towards the phone and as a client towards the server. A proxy is addressed via
the IP address/domain name and port.
Public IP address
The public IP address is the address for a network component on the Internet. It is
assigned by the Internet service provider. Devices that act as a link from a local network to the Internet (gateway, router) have a public and a local IP address.
See also: IP address, NAT.
Q
Quality of Service (QoS)
Describes the Quality of Service in communication networks. Differentiations are
made between various Quality of Service classes.
QoS influences the flow of data packets on the Internet, e.g., by prioritising data packets, reserving bandwidth and optimising data packets.
In VoIP networks, QoS influences the voice quality. If the whole infrastructure (router,
network server etc.) has QoS, the voice quality is better, i.e., fewer delays, less echoing,
less crackling.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
R
RAM
Random Access Memory
Memory in which you have reading and storage rights. Items such as melodies and
screen pictures are saved in the RAM after you have loaded them onto the phone via
the Web configurator.
Registrar
The registrar manages the network subscribers' current IP addresses. When you register with your VoIP provider, your current IP address is saved on the registrar. This
means you can also be reached when on the move.
ROM
Read Only Memory
A type of memory that can only be read.
Router
Routes data packets within a network and between different networks via the quickest
route. Can connect Ethernet networks and WLAN. Can be the gateway to the Internet.
Routing
Routing is the transfer of data packets to another subscriber in your network. On their
way to the recipient, the data packets are sent from one router to the next until they
reach their destination.
If data packets were not forwarded in this way, a network like the Internet would not
be possible. Routing connects the individual networks to this global system.
A router is a part of this system; it transfers data packets both within a local network
and from one network to the next. Transfer of data from one network to another is performed on the basis of a common protocol.
183
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
RSS feed
Really Simple Syndication (also Rich Site Summary)
Provision of data in RSS format. RSS is an Internet service that summarises an Internet
page in a short paragraph and includes a link to the original page. Users can subscribe
to an RSS feed and receive automatically updated information.
RTCP
Real-Time Control Protocol
Is used to control the RTP protocol. The RTCP protocol is a control protocol and therefore knows which of the transferred RTP sessions belong together.
RTCP port
(Local) port by means of which voice data packets are sent and received for VoIP.
RTP
Real-Time Transport Protocol
Global standard for transferring audio and video data. Often used in conjunction with
UDP. In this case, RTP packets are embedded in UDP packets.
S
Server
Makes a service available to other network subscribers (clients). The term can indicate
a computer/PC or an application. A server is addressed via the IP address/domain
name and port.
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol)
Signalling protocol independent of voice communication. Used for establishing and
ending a call. It is also possible to define parameters for voice transmission.
Version 2, 27.05.2010
SIP address
See URI.
SIP port/Local SIP port
(Local) port by means of which SIP signalling data is sent and received for VoIP.
SIP provider
See VoIP provider.
SIP proxy server
IP address of your VoIP provider's gateway server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier
The SSID is used to identify the stations in a wireless network (WLAN). All wireless network components with the same SSID form a common network. The SSID can be
assigned by the network operator.
Static IP address
See Fixed IP address.
184
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
STUN
Simple Transversal of UDP over NAT
NAT control mechanism.
STUN is a data protocol for VoIP telephones. STUN replaces the private IP address in the
VoIP telephone data packets with the public address of the secure private network. To
control data transfer, a STUN server is also required on the Internet. STUN cannot be
implemented with symmetric NATs.
See also: ALG, Firewall, NAT, Outbound proxy.
Subnet
Segment of a network.
Subnet mask
IP addresses consist of a fixed line network number and a variable subscriber number.
The network number is identical for all network subscribers. The size of the network
number part is determined in the subnet mask. In the subnet mask 255.255.255.0, for
example, the first three parts of the IP address are the network number and the last
part is the subscriber number.
Symmetric NAT
A symmetric NAT assigns different external IP addresses and port numbers to the same
internal IP addresses and port numbers – depending on the external target address.
T
Version 2, 27.05.2010
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
Transport protocol. Session-based transmission protocol: it sets up, monitors and terminates a connection between sender and recipient for transporting data.
TLS
Transport Layer Security
Protocol for encrypting data transmissions on the Internet. TLS is a superordinate
transport protocol.
Transmission rate
Speed at which data is transmitted in the WAN or LAN. The transmission rate is measured in data units per unit of time (Mbit/s).
Transport protocol
Controls data transport between two communication partners (applications).
See also: UDP, TCP, TLS.
185
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
Transport protocol. Unlike TCP, UDP is a non session-based protocol. UDP does not
establish a fixed connection. The data packets ("datagrams") are sent as a broadcast.
The recipient is solely responsible for making sure the data is received. The sender is
not notified about whether it is received or not.
URI
Uniform Resource Identifier
Character sequence for identifying resources (e.g., e-mail recipient, www.gigaset.com,
files).
On the Internet, URIs are used as a unique identification for resources. URIs are also
described as SIP addresses.
URIs can be entered in the phone as a number. By dialling a URI, you can call an Internet
subscriber with VoIP equipment.
URL
Universal Resource Locator
Globally unique address of a domain on the Internet.
A URL is a subtype of the URI. URLs identify a resource by its location on the Internet.
For historical reasons the term is often used as a synonym for URI.
User ID
See User identification.
User identification
Name/number combination for access, e.g., to your VoIP account.
V
Voice codec
See Codec.
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
Calls are no longer established and transmitted via the telephone network, but via the
Internet (or other IP networks).
Version 2, 27.05.2010
VoIP provider
A VoIP, SIP or gateway provider is an Internet service provider that provides a gateway
for Internet telephony. As the phone works with the SIP standard, your provider must
support the SIP standard.
The provider routes calls from VoIP to the telephone network (analogue, ISDN and
mobile) and vice versa.
186
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / glossary.fm / 11/4/10
Glossary
W
Version 2, 27.05.2010
WAN
Wide Area Network
Wide-area network that is unrestricted in terms of area (e.g., Internet).
WLAN
Wireless LAN
Wireless LANs enable network components to communicate with a network using
radio waves as the transport medium. A wireless LAN can be connected as an extension to a wired LAN or it can form the basis for a new network. The basic element of a
wireless network is the cell. This is the area where the wireless communication takes
place. A WLAN can be operated in ad hoc mode or in the Infrastructure network.
WLAN is currently specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard.
WPA
Security standard in wireless networks.
WPA-PSK
WPA Pre-shared Key
Data encryption on wireless networks in which new keys are automatically generated
at regular intervals using a keyword (pre-shared key). The key is updated after a specified period of time.
A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619
187
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Index
Index
Numerics
C
24-hour format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
deleting an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
showing on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Call
accepting via receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
anonymous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
in call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
missed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
outgoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
recording onto a USB storage device. . 37
rejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
transferring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
two-way recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Call divert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 139, 152
no answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
when busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Call duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
all calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
deleting an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
dialling a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 44
missed calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 43
outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
saved information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
transferring entry to directory . . . . . . . . 45
Call Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Call recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Call records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 141
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
playing back via the display menu . . . . 58
Call records key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 37
Call swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Call transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
secure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
A
Accepting a call
using function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 129, 174
Acknowledge tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Adjusting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Advisory tone
confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
key press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Advisory tones
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
deleting from calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
displaying in calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
missed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
showing in display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Alarm clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ringer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Anonymous calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Area codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Audio quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Automatic configuration of VoIP
accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Version 2, 27.05.2010
B
Backlight
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Birthday
displaying in calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
showing on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
BLF (Busy Lamp Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 114, 131
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 95
changing the name of the registered
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
changing the name of your own device95
registering device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
registering/de-registering device . . . . . 94
searching for device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
188
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Index
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
accepting call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
rejecting call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Caller
name on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
picture on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Caller picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
in directory entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
in resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 43
withholding for all calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
withholding once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Capacity
displaying in Web configurator . . . . . . 162
Caring for your telephone . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
Certificate
import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Characters
correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
upper, lower case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Checking the capacity of the
resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CLIR (Calling Line Identification
Restriction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Codec
G.711 μ law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
G.711 a law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
G.722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
G.726 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
G.729 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Codec preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
adding callers on hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
adding new participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Conference key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 40
Configuring an e-mail account . . . . . . . . 115
Confirmation tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting
extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
power adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . 14
Connection frame for extension module 17
Consultation call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Consultation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 38
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Correcting
incorrectly entered characters . . . . . . . . 23
incorrectly entered digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
D
Data
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Data format
for picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
for sound files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Date
setting via display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Date format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Deactivating the microphone . . . . . . . . . . 36
DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 113
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
connecting a mobile phone via DECT 113
registering device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
registering/de-registering device . . . . . 96
Default number in directory entry . . . . . . 50
Deleting a digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Determining prefix length . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Diagnostic information
PCAP logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
SIP logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
system log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Dialling a number
cancelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
from call list (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
from directory (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
via function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dialling plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
area codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Dialling see Dialling a number
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) . . . . . . 123
Directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Directory
accessing via key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
transferring from PC to phone. . . . . . . 159
transferring to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
189
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Index
Directory entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
caller picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
changing default number . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
entering numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Directory key
programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Directory, LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 150
dialling a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
searching for an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Directory, local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Directory, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
displaying entry details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
personal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
refining search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
searching for a name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
searching for a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
transferring entry to directory . . . . . . . . 56
Directory, on USB storage device . . . . . . . 51
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 155
backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
display formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
during call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
in idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 74
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
returning to idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
time-controlled deactivation . . . . . . . . 156
Display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 155
Display icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Display in idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
displaying calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
displaying picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
displaying time zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
returning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 22
Display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
illustration in the user guide . . . . . . . . . 27
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
DND (Do Not Disturb) see Do
Not Disturb
DNS server
alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86, 119, 120
preferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86, 119, 120
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Do Not Disturb (DND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Do Not Disturb key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 36
DSL router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
DTMF transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
E
E-mail
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
displaying messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
displaying new messages . . . . . . . 115, 143
in Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
messages whilst making a
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
opening incoming e-mail list . . . . . . . . . 60
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
spam protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
via secure connection (SSL) . . . . . 115, 143
E-mail account
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
E-mail icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
new message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
E-mail server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 177
Encryption (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
End key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 31
Ending call
by hanging up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
with end call key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Entering special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Entering standard gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Entry mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 166
Error tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 82
Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Expanding memory via USB . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
connection frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
190
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Index
F
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 158
restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
File server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Free software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
selecting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
G
G.722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Gigabit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Gigaset QuickSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Gigaset T500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
GNU General Public Licence (GPL) . . . . . 167
H
Handset
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
registering via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . 114
registering via DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Headset
adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
calling via . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
registering via Bluetooth . . . 92, 114, 131
registering via DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 113
Headset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
HTTP server
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Version 2, 27.05.2010
I
ICE (Interactive Connectivity
Establishment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Idle display
showing slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Idle status (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Incoming e-mail list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Incoming e-mail server . . . . . . . 59, 115, 142
Info service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Info services
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
weather report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Info services, info services
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Information Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Information Centre key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 68
Insert strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Installation wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
select stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
selecting stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Internet service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
as screensaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Internet telephony
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 108
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
auto-configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 120
dynamic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 118
finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
IPv4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 119
IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 120
prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 120
static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83, 85, 118, 120
IP protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83, 88, 118
IPv4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
K
Kensington lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key
call records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 37
conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 40
consultation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 38
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 36
end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Information Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 68
Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 32, 62
mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 36
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 24
programmable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 36
transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 41
volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 35
Key light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
L
LAN port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
LAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 118
191
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Index
Language
for the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
for the Web configurator. . . . . . . . . . . . 156
LDAP
display name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
name attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
name filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
number attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
number filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
search area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
server address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
user name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 150
LDAP contacts
in display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 150
LEDs see Light Emitting Diodes
Licence, GPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Light Emitting Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
List
accepted calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
all calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
missed calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
scrolling through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Local contacts
in display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Version 2, 27.05.2010
M
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Medical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Memory keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
start tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Menu tree
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 62
icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
opening message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Message Centre key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 62
Messages
call records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
e-mails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 142
Missed alarm
deleting from list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
displaying in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
in Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Missed call
in call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
in Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Mobile phone
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
registering via Bluetooth . . . 92, 114, 131
registering via DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 113
MobileOFFICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 127
Move cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mute key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 36
Mute see Muting
Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
MWI (Message Waiting Indication) . . 57, 144
N
NAS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
refresh time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Navigation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 24
Network
setting up for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . 19
setting up via display menu . . . . . . . . . . 82
setting up via Web configurator . . . . . 117
wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Network configuration
default setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Network mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 142
new message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Network name (SSID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Network provider data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Network search (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Network type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Notification of incoming e-mail . . . . . . . . 59
Number
dialling from call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
dialling from LDAP directory . . . . . . . . . 52
entering via keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
selecting from the directory. . . . . . . . . . 51
showing on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
transferring to local directory . . . . . . . . 31
192
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Index
O
R
On hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Online directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
selecting provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Online directory see
Directory, online
Open listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operating the telephone
via display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Outbound proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Outbound server
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Radio network see WLAN
Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Receiver
adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Redial list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 43
Registration server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Remote management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
caller pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
checking capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
pictures for screensaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
sounds for ringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Restoring the default settings . . . . . . . . . . 81
Ringback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
activating/deactivating function . . . . . 33
Ringer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
adjusting the volume while phone
is ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
alternative volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
for alarm clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
setting melody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
silencing for anonymous calls . . . . . . . . 73
sound in resource directory . . . . . . . . . 100
volume for appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
volume for incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . 71
RSS feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) . . . . . 123
P
Password for Web configurator . . . . . . . . 154
PCAP log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Phone
factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
operating in the network . . . . . . . . . . . 122
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Pictures
data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
for callers in directory entry
(display menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
for display in idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
for slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
in resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
PoE (Power over Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 15
Power adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Prefix of the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 120
Priority of voice data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 121
Programmable keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Protection against theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Provider profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Provisioning file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Proxy server
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Q
Version 2, 27.05.2010
QoS (Quality of Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
S
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Screensaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Internet service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
pictures in resource directory . . . . . . . . 98
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Screensaver see Screensaver
Security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
server certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Selecting for idle display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Selecting for screensaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Server certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
193
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Index
Service Set Identifier see SSID
Setting language
for Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
setting up for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Setting up the device via the display . . . . 18
Settings
creating via Web configurator . . . . . . . 117
Settings via display menu
advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
display backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
display in idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
screensaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Setup assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Shared line
defining for function key. . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Signal strength of the WLAN . . . . . . . . . 4, 89
Silence suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Silences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
SIP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
SIP logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
SIP provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Sound
data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
in resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 100
Spam protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Speaker
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Speaker key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 30, 36
Speaker mode
adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 163
Speed dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
SRTP (Secure Real-time Transport
Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
SRTP security type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
SSID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 184
Standard gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 119
Standard VoIP account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Stations for Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Storage allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
STUN
refresh time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
STUN server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 119
System log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
date/time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
T
Telephone settings
in display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
in Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
saving for MobileOFFICE . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Telephony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Time
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
showing on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Time server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Time zone
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
showing on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Tone scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Transfer key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 41
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
U
Usage scenario
professional environment with phone
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
without phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
USB connection
as memory expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
for MobileOffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
USB mode
expanding memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
MobileOffice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 127
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
de-registering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 127
directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
User identification
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
User interface
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
194
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset DE900 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2210-R101-2x-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 11/4/10
Index
V
vCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
VLAN (VIrtual Local Area Network) . . . . . . 86
VLAN priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 121
VLAN tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 142
in Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 137
VoIP account
automatic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
configuration via provider profile . . . . 109
DTMF transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
entering login data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
entering registration data . . . . . . . . . . . 112
manual configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
personal provider data . . . . . . . . . 112, 135
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
VoIP status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Volume for ringer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Volume key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 35
WLAN signal strength
in display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Workgroup server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
WPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
WPA, Pre-Shared Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
W
Version 2, 27.05.2010
Weather report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Web address
in directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
changing password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
selecting language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
setup assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
user identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Wireless cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Wireless LAN see WLAN
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 187
access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 129
encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
network search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 129
SSID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
195
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846
Gigaset Communications GmbH
Frankenstraße 2a, D-46395 Bocholt
All rights reserved. Subject to availability.
www.gigaset.com/pro
www.InternetVoipPhone.co.uk | sales@internetvoipphone.co.uk | 0800 088 4846